JP7257070B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Pachinko gaming machines generally have a specific game state (for example, a reduced working time game state), and the specific game state includes a specific game state 30 times and a specific game state 100 times. There was (for example, patent document 1).

JP 2017-131353 A

By the way, when a plurality of types of specific game states are provided, there has been a demand for a suitable display according to the situation.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In view of such circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a suitable display according to the situation in a gaming machine having a plurality of types of specific game states.

A gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a game area in which a game ball can flow down and which includes a normal path and a specific path different from the normal path, a starting port formed in the game area, and the game area. and whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player and opens the large winning opening for a predetermined number of times based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening . a determining means for determining, starting variable display of identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole, and stopping the variable display as the variable time elapses to derive the result of the determination; A game that controls identification information display means, a first time-saving game state advantageous to the player, and a second time -saving game state that is different from the first time -saving game state and is advantageous to the player. a technique state control means; a first promotion notification for prompting the shooting of the game ball toward the specific path; Promotion notification and promotion notification means capable of executing, it is determined that the special game is executed in the first time-saving game state, and it is possible to shift after the special game is completed, and the second It is possible to shift to the 2 o'clock short game state when a predetermined condition based on the determination that the special game is not executed is satisfied, and the promotion notification means is the second game state during the execution of the special game. 1 promotion information can be executed, and when the special game is ended and the state is shifted to the first time-saving game state, the first promotion information can be executed, but the second promotion information is not executed, and the second promotion information is not executed. It is characterized by being able to perform said 1st promotion information and said 2nd promotion information, when it transfers to a 2 o'clock reduction game state.

According to the present invention, in a gaming machine having a plurality of types of specific game states, suitable display according to the situation can be performed.

1 is an external front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is an external rear view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a diagram showing a special symbol hit determination table, a normal symbol hit determination table, and game state details according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table and a normal symbol determination table according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the winning special design details which concern on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a diagram showing a special symbol variation pattern table according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 3 is a diagram showing a determination information storage area of a main RAM, a counter of the main RAM, and an information storage area of the main RAM according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main control board main processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing set value change processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing set value confirmation processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing main control board timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing input switch detection processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing processing when detecting a first starting port according to the first embodiment of the present invention; It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of the 2nd starting opening detection concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing processing when a passing gate is detected according to the first embodiment of the present invention; It is a flow chart which shows special design related processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special design fluctuation concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the processing classified by game state according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows winning game processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing abnormality determination processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; It is a flow chart which shows production control board main processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing the effect control board timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing operation device input processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing main command reception processing (1/2) according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main command reception processing (2/2) according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing specific effect determination processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production|presentation which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a winning sound, a changing sound, and a starter light emitting device (color) for each icon according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing of an image/sound control unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing processing when a volume value/light intensity value related subcommand is received according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing processing when receiving a start port-related subcommand according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing image/sound control unit timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing main processing of a light emission drive control unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of a light emission drive control unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a conceptual diagram of image generation processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a figure explaining the 1st example of the alerting|reporting aspect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 2nd example of the alerting|reporting aspect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 2nd example (another example) of the alerting|reporting aspect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 3rd example of the alerting|reporting aspect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 4th example of the alerting|reporting aspect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 5th example of the alerting|reporting aspect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 6th example of the alerting|reporting aspect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 6th example (another example) of the alerting|reporting aspect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 7th example of the alerting|reporting aspect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 8th example of the alerting|reporting aspect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 9th example of the alerting|reporting aspect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 9th example (another example) of the alerting|reporting aspect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 10th example of the alerting|reporting aspect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 11th example of the alerting|reporting aspect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the 12th example of the alerting|reporting aspect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart for explaining the opportunity 1 and the opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state and the variable probability gaming state according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the opportunity 1 and the opportunity 2 in the normal game state according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the opportunity 1 and the opportunity 2 in the normal game state according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the opportunity 1 and the opportunity 2 in the normal game state according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a notification mode in a game in which the normal game state game number counter has become a predetermined counter according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a notification mode in a game in which the normal game state game number counter has become a predetermined counter according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart for explaining the time-saving gaming state shifted at the opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state shifted at the opportunity 2 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart for explaining the transition to the time-saving gaming state by the opportunity 1 and the transition to the time-saving gaming state by the opportunity 2 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart for explaining the transition to the time-saving gaming state by the opportunity 1 and the transition to the time-saving gaming state by the opportunity 2 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between songs that can be output at Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart for explaining the time-saving gaming state shifted at the opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state shifted at the opportunity 2 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining the production mode in the normal game state after the time saving game state according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart for explaining the time-saving gaming state shifted at the opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state shifted at the opportunity 2 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart for explaining the time-saving gaming state shifted at the opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state shifted at the opportunity 2 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the specific production|presentation which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. 4 is a time chart showing an update example of the normal game state game number counter according to the first embodiment of the present invention; It is a time chart showing an update example (additional example 1) of the normal game state game number counter according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart showing an update example (another example 2) of the normal game state game number counter according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode in the time-saving game state which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the normal game state and an update example of the normal game state game number counter according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the production example of the action production|presentation which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a diagram showing a special symbol hit determination table, a normal symbol hit determination table, and game state details according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table and a normal symbol determination table according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram (another example) showing a special symbol determination table and a normal symbol determination table according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process classified by game state based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows winning game processing concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a winning game process (another example) according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart for explaining the opportunity 1 and the opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state and the variable probability gaming state according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a special symbol hit determination table, a normal symbol hit determination table, and game state details according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table and a normal symbol determination table according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of the 2nd starting opening detection concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start time process according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing a drop lottery process according to the third embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart for explaining trigger 1 and trigger 2 in the fall probability variation according to the third embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart for explaining trigger 1 and trigger 2 in the fall probability variation according to the third embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. In the following first embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 will be described as an example of a game machine according to the present invention. In the following description, "front", "rear", "left", "right", "upper" and "lower" refer to the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. pointing.

(External configuration of pachinko game machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko game machine 1 is pivotally supported by an outer frame 2 for installation on a game machine installation island (not shown) of a game parlor, and a game board 6 shown in FIG. a glass frame 4 pivotally supported by the middle frame 3 and opposed to the front side of the game board 6 so that the game board 6 can be visually recognized through transparent glass; and the middle frame 3 and a receiving tray member 5 which is pivotally supported by the glass frame 4 and positioned below the glass frame 4 and capable of storing game balls. In addition, the glass frame 4 and the receiving plate member 5 may be configured as a separate type, or may be configured as an integrated type.

In addition, the middle frame 3 is provided with a shooting device (not shown in FIG. 1) for shooting game balls into the game area 7 of the game board 6. A firing handle 8 is provided. The shooting handle 8 is gripped by the player and can be rotated within a predetermined range so that the shooting intensity when shooting the game ball into the game area 7 can be adjusted by the amount of rotation. It's becoming For example, when it is rotated by the first rotation amount (when it is the first firing intensity), the game ball is shot to the left side of the game area 7 (so-called "left hitting" is possible), and the first When the ball is rotated by a second amount of rotation larger than the amount of rotation (in the case of the second firing intensity), the game ball is shot to the right side of the game area 7 (so-called "right-handed shot"). ” is possible).

Although not shown, the firing handle 8 is provided with a handle touch sensor. This handle touch sensor is turned ON when the player grips the shooting handle 8 , and the ON signal is input to the payout control board 300 . Thereby, it can be grasped that the shooting handle 8 is held by the player.

Also, the glass frame 4 is provided with a light emitting device 9 (lamp, LED, etc.) so that the pachinko game machine 1 can be decorated by emitting light. For example, in the special symbol winning determination process described later, it is possible to execute an effect of notifying the winning by emitting light in rainbow colors based on the fact that the winning is determined.

Also, a speaker 10 is provided on the glass frame 4 (upper side) to output voice and sound effects. For example, when the normal game state described below is controlled, music corresponding to the normal game state can be output, and when the time-saving game state described later is controlled, music corresponding to the time-saving game state is output. It is possible.
A lower speaker 10 is provided on the glass frame 4 (lower side), and can output voice and sound effects. The lower speaker 10 is provided with a speaker lamp 10a, which emits light in a prize-winning flash effect, which will be described later.

The receiving tray member 5 is composed of an upper receiving tray 5a and a lower receiving tray 5b. When the amount of game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 5a exceeds a predetermined amount, the game balls are dispensed to the lower receiving tray 5b. It has become. In addition, on the receiving tray member 5, when the game is over, a ball ejection button 11 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 5a to the lower receiving tray 5b, and a game ball for a game ball lending device (not shown). a ball lending button 12 for requesting the payout of the ball, a card return button 13 for requesting the return of the valuable value medium inserted into the insertion slot of the game ball lending device, and the balance for displaying the balance of the valuable value medium A display unit 12a and a ball lendable lamp 12b for notifying that the ball lending by operating the ball lending button 12 is possible are provided.

In addition, on the tray member 5, an operation prompting effect (for example, an effect in which an image simulating an operation means + an image saying "Press!" is displayed on the operation means) is executed. A performance button 14 and a performance lever 15 that can be operated by the player are provided. In addition, the receiver member 5 can be operated by the player to adjust the volume of sound and sound effects output from the speaker 10, adjust the amount of light emitted from the light emitting device 9, and adjust the amount of light emitted from the image display device 26, which will be described later. A cross key button 16 is provided for adjusting the amount of light, activating a menu screen, and performing operations corresponding to each menu. Note that the effect button 14 and the effect lever 15 may be provided independently, or may be provided integrally.
As an operation device for operating the menu screen, the cross key button 16 may be separately provided with a dedicated operation device for adjusting the volume and the amount of light.

(Regarding the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1)
Next, based on FIG. 2, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. Various control boards such as a main control board 100, an effect control board 200, a payout control board 300 and a payout device 304, and a power supply board 400 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 (exactly , these various control boards are attached to the rear surface of the middle frame 3).

A RAM clear switch 105 is also provided on the main control board 100 . The RAM clear switch 105 is a switch for initializing game information that is rewritten in the area of the main RAM 103 when a game is played. For example, when the closing time of the amusement arcade is reached while the time-saving game state is reached, the manager (for example, the game clerk) turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch 105, the game information in the time-saving game state is cleared. , it can be started from the normal game state at the opening time of the next day.

The RAM clear switch 105 is also a switch for switching set values in a setting change state, which will be described later. Details will be described later in the flow chart. For example, in the case of providing six levels of setting values, when the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed once while the setting value "1" is displayed on the display 104, which will be described later, the setting value When the setting value "1" is changed to the setting value "2" and the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed once, the setting value is changed from "2" to the setting value "3". , set value “4”, set value “5”, and set value “6”, and when the set value “6” is displayed on the display 104, when the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed once, the set value The set value is switched from "6" to "1".

Although the RAM clear switch 105 is provided on the main control board 100, it may be provided on the power supply board 400 or may be provided directly on the middle frame 3 as long as it can be input to the main control board 100.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a setting change keyhole 31 (also referred to as a setting key SW in this embodiment). The setting change keyhole 31 is used when setting one of a plurality of stages of setting values, which will be described later. Specifically, a setting change key (not shown) managed by a store clerk is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees (rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction), When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on (the power switch 400a is turned on) while pressing the RAM clear switch 105, a setting change state is entered in which setting values can be set. Details of the setting change state will be described later with a flowchart.

The setting change keyhole 31 is also used to check the currently set value. Specifically, a setting change key managed by a store clerk is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees (rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction) so that the pachinko machine 1 When the power is turned on (the power switch 400a is turned on), a setting confirmation state is entered in which setting values can be confirmed. Details of the setting confirmation state will be described later with a flowchart.

It should be noted that the setting change keyhole 31 can be rotated by a setting change key. can be detected.

Although the setting change keyhole 31 is provided in the main control board 100, the installation location is not limited to this. For example, the middle frame 3 may be provided with a setting change keyhole 31 .

A display 104 is also provided on the main control board 100 . If the display 104 is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the setting value is displayed. The number of payouts/the number of outs in the normal game state)×100" is displayed.

Note that the game performance information is calculated for each interrupt (for example, every 4 ms) in a state other than the setting change state or setting confirmation state (for example, the state in which the interrupt is permitted in step S18 of FIG. 10). The current section and the past three sections (one section before, two sections before, and three sections before) are displayed at predetermined display timings (for example, every five seconds). It is possible. That is, display of current section→elapsed predetermined time (elapsed 5 seconds)→display of past section (1)→elapsed of predetermined time (elapsed 5 seconds)→display of past section (2)→elapsed predetermined time (5 seconds) elapsed)→display of past section (3)→elapsed predetermined time (elapsed 5 seconds)→display of current section.

(Regarding the configuration of the game board 6)
Next, based on FIG. 3, the configuration of the game board 6 of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

The game board 6 is made of a veneer material or a transparent synthetic resin material, and an image display device 26 is detachably attached to the back side thereof. In addition, the game board 6 is formed with a game area 7 in which game balls can roll. A member 19 is formed. In addition, the game area 7 includes a gate member 20 through which a game ball can pass, a first starting hole 21 through which a game ball can enter, and a stage 17 for facilitating ball entry into the first starting hole 21. , a second starting hole 22 into which a game ball can enter, a normal winning hole 23 into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball entering when a winning game described later (see FIG. 22) is being executed. A possible big winning opening 24, an out opening 25 for discharging game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings outside the game area (game ball discharge gutter), and a movable body 28 that can move in the vertical direction. , In addition, a game nail (not shown), a windmill, etc. are provided.

The game area 7 includes a first game area 7a formed on the left side of the center line C (a game area for so-called "left-handed hitting") and a second game area 7b formed on the right side of the center line C (a so-called " It has a game area for performing "right hitting".

(Regarding gate member 20)
The gate member 20 is provided in the right central portion of the game area 7, and allows the game ball to pass through when the game ball is shot to the right side of the game area 7, i.e., when the game ball is hit to the right. It's becoming In addition, it is always open upwards to always allow the passage of game balls. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate member 20, the later-described "passing gate detection processing" is performed, and whether or not the protruding member (not shown) provided in the second start port 22 is protruded is "normal". A "symbol hit determination process" is performed, and a "normal symbol variation game" for deriving the determination result of the normal symbol hit determination process is executed after the normal symbol variation time elapses.
In addition, the gate member 20 may also be provided in the left central portion of the game area 7 .

When the game ball further passes through the gate member 20 while the normal symbol variation game based on passage through the gate member 20 is being performed, the execution of the normal symbol variation game based on the passage is suspended. Except for the normal symbol variation game being executed, a maximum of "4" can be reserved. Specifically, the main RAM 103 is provided with a reserved storage area for the normal symbol variation game, and the reserved storage area corresponds to the currently varying normal symbol variation game as shown in FIG. 9(B). ``the relevant variation storage area'', the ``first storage area'' corresponding to the normal symbol variation game to be performed after the currently varying normal symbol variation game is finished, hereinafter referred to as the ``second storage area'', and `` It consists of a "third storage area" and a "fourth storage area". The stored determination information (random value) is transferred, the determination information (random value) stored in the "second storage area" is transferred to the "first storage area", and the "second storage area" is stored in the " The determination information (random value) stored in the "third storage area" is transferred, the determination information (random value) stored in the "fourth storage area" is transferred to the "third storage area", and the "fourth storage area" is transferred. storage area is empty.

(Regarding the first start port 21)
The first starting port 21 is provided in the central part of the game area 7, and when the game ball is shot to the left side of the game area 7, so-called "left hitting", the game ball enters. It is possible. In addition, it is always open upwards and always allows game balls to enter. Then, when the game ball enters the first start port 21, for example, "3" game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if any reserved storage area other than the prize balls is empty, a special symbol is displayed. Hit determination processing is performed, the special symbol and decorative symbol image and the fourth symbol image to be described later are variably displayed, and after the fluctuation time described later has passed, the determination result (special symbol and decorative symbol) of the special symbol hit determination process is derived. (Confirmed display) "symbol variation game" is executed.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 while the symbol changing game based on the ball entering the first starting hole 21 is being performed, execution of the symbol changing game based on the entering ball is suspended. A maximum of "4" can be reserved except for the symbol variation game being executed.

Specifically, the main RAM 103 is provided with a reserved memory area for the symbol variation game, and as shown in FIG. The variation storage area", the "first storage area" corresponding to the symbol variation game to be played after the currently varying symbol variation game is finished, and hereinafter referred to as the "second storage area" and the "third storage area". ” and a “fourth storage area”. Then, when the pattern variation game that is currently fluctuating in a state where the determination information (random value) is stored in all of the reserved storage areas is completed, the "variation storage area" The stored determination information (random value) is transferred, the determination information (random value) stored in the "second storage area" is transferred to the "first storage area", and the "second storage area" is stored in the " The determination information (random value) stored in the "third storage area" is transferred, the determination information (random value) stored in the "fourth storage area" is transferred to the "third storage area", and the "fourth storage area" is transferred. storage area is empty.
Although the first starting port 21 is a ball-entering port through which a game ball can enter, it may be configured as a passage area through which a game ball can pass.

A starting port light emitting device 21 a is provided around the first starting port 21 . For example, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the starting hole light emitting device 21a emits light to notify that the ball has entered, or when performing a holding prefetch effect to be described later. It is possible to emit light in the same color as the color of the pending icon that is the target of the.

(Regarding the second starting port 22)
The second starting port 22 is provided in the right central part of the game area 7, and when the game ball is shot to the right side of the game area 7, so-called "right hitting", the game ball enters. Ball is enabled. In addition, unlike the first starting port 21, the second starting port 22 is not always open upward, and in principle, does not allow entry of game balls (it is in a "closed" state). That is, the second starting port 22 has a protruding member that can protrude forward, and only when this protruding member protrudes forward ("open" state), the game ball can enter. It becomes possible.

Regarding whether or not to allow the game ball to enter by projecting the protruding member forward, when it is determined that the normal symbol hit is determined in the normal symbol hit determination process, the "opening and closing of the second start port" in FIG. It is possible to open and close in the opening and closing mode shown in "Mode". Then, when the game ball enters the second start port 22, for example, "2" game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if any of the reserved storage areas are empty in addition to the prize balls, the pattern changes. the game is running.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 22 while the pattern changing game based on the ball entering the second starting hole 22 is being performed, execution of the symbol changing game based on the entering ball is suspended. A maximum of "4" can be reserved except for the symbol variation game being executed. Since the specific configuration of the main RAM 103 related to suspension is the same as that of the first start port 21 described above, description thereof will be omitted.

As the second starting opening 22, a protruding member movable in the front-rear direction is used, but a so-called "electric tulip" having movable wing pieces may be used.
Further, the second starting port 22 is a ball-entering port through which game balls can enter, but may be configured as a passage area through which game balls can pass.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball enters the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22, the special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the special symbol, the decorative symbol image and the fourth symbol image are variably displayed. Then, after the variation time elapses, the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process (special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image) is derived (confirmed display). , Sometimes simply referred to as "game of 1 variation". Also, the execution of the "symbol variation game" may be referred to as "variation display".

Further, when one game ball enters the first starting port 21, the first special symbol display device 27a and the image display device 26 display "symbol variation" based on the entry of one game ball. "Game" is executed, and when one game ball enters the second starting port 22, the second special symbol display device 27b and the image display device 26 indicate that one game ball has entered. Based on the "symbol variation game" is executed. Therefore, the "symbol variation game" is a generic term for games played on the first special symbol display device 27a and the image display device 26, and also by the second special symbol display device 27b and the image display device 26. It refers to the generic name of the game that is played.

In addition, in the present embodiment, deriving the determination result (special symbol and decorative symbol image and fourth symbol image) of the special symbol hit determination process after the variation time in the symbol variation game has passed means (special symbol and decoration This is called "confirmed display" of the symbol image and the fourth symbol image). On the other hand, in the symbol variation game, temporarily stopping the decorative symbol image before the variation time elapses is referred to as "temporary stop display" of the decorative symbol image. Examples of the "temporary stop display" include "reach", which will be described later, and "shake fluctuation display" before "fixed display". "Shake fluctuation display" before "fixed display" means that, for example, the decorative pattern image is "temporarily stopped" at "767" or the like, and then "fixedly displayed" at "767", or once " ``Temporary stop display'' for the display of the failure of ``767'', and after performing a reversal effect to derive ``777'', ``Confirmation display'' of ``777'' is performed, or variable display performed at the branch point. be done.

(Regarding the regular prize gate 23)
The normal winning openings 23 are provided in the lower left of the game area 7 with "3" and "1" in the lower right, totaling "4". A game ball can be entered when so-called "left-handed" is performed, and "1" normal winning opening 23 at the lower right is provided when so-called "right-handed" is performed. A game ball can enter. In addition, the normal prize winning opening 23 is always open upward like the first starting opening 21, and always permits entry of game balls. Then, when game balls enter the normal winning hole 23, for example, "8" game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the arrangement position of the normal winning openings 23 can be arbitrarily changed, and the number thereof may be less than "4". Also, the number of prize balls may be different between the "3" normal winning holes 23 on the lower left and the "1" normal winning holes 23 on the lower right.
In addition, in the winning game, when the game ball enters the normal winning opening 23, the speaker 10 and the image display device 26 are used to notify the ball entry (see FIG. 53), other than the winning game (for example, normal game state) When a game ball enters the normal winning hole 23, the ball entry notification using the speaker 10 and the image display device 26 is not performed.
The normal winning openings 23 to be notified of the ball entry in the winning game may be "4" normal winning openings 23, only "1" normal winning openings 23 on the lower right, or the lower left "3" normal winning openings 23 may be used.

(Regarding Grand Prize Gate 24)
The big winning opening 24 is provided in the lower right part of the game area 7, and a game ball can be entered when so-called "right-handed hitting" is performed. In addition, the big winning opening 24 has an opening and closing door, and when a winning is determined in the special symbol winning determination process, a winning game is executed, the opening and closing door tilts forward, and the game ball enters. allow. Then, when game balls enter the big winning hole 24, for example, "12" game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, in the winning game, the opening/closing door of the big winning opening 24 is opened (tilted forward) over the number of awarded rounds shown in FIG. Then, it opens (tilts forward) for 29.5 seconds (S=seconds) per round, and when the entry of 10 game balls is detected by the later-described large winning hole detection SW 24a before 29.5 seconds have elapsed. , 29. Even before 29.5 seconds have elapsed, the opening/closing door is closed to advance to the next round, and this is repeated for the prescribed number of rounds. On the other hand, when 29.5 seconds (so-called "attacker full open") elapses before 10 game balls are detected by the big winning hole detection SW 24a, the opening/closing door is closed to proceed to the next round. Become. In this case, one round game ends without reaching 10 balls, which is the prescribed number of entering balls per round, which is disadvantageous for the player.

In the present embodiment, an opening/closing door that tilts forward is used as the big prize opening 24, but a so-called "electric tulip" may be used, or a "shutter member" that advances and retreats in the front-rear direction may be used. good.

(Regarding the image display device 26)
The image display device 26 has a display area over substantially the entire area, is provided so as to be positioned above the stage 17, and can display a symbol variation game and effect images in the display area. That is, based on the fact that the game ball enters the first start port 21 or the second start port 22 and the special symbol hit determination process is performed, the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26a are displayed. The pattern image 26c is varied (vertically scrolled) in the variable display area. In addition, even when the game ball enters the first start port 21 and the game ball enters the second start port 22, the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and the right decorative pattern image 26a are common. The pattern image 26c is fluctuated (vertically scrolled) in the variable display area (the special pattern display device is different, but the decorative pattern image used in the image display device 26 is common).

Then, the performance image is displayed within the fluctuation time described later, and when the fluctuation time elapses, if the winning is achieved, for example, "7" is stopped in each decorative design image, and the decorative design combination of "777" is performed. Winning is reported by making a definite display. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, for example, the combination of the decorative symbols "765" is displayed as a confirmation to notify that the game is a loss.

Separately from each decorative design image, a fourth design image 26d (the "fourth" design next to the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, and the right decorative design image 26c) is displayed on the right side of the display area. It can be displayed in the lower part, and in synchronism with each decorative pattern image, variable display and fixed display are possible. In addition, the image display device 26 displays a first start opening pending number image 26e that displays the number of holdings of the symbol variation game at the first start opening 21 as "0" to "4", and a symbol variation at the second start opening 22. A second starting opening pending number image 26f displaying the number of pending games as ``0'' to ``4'', and a first starting opening displaying the number of pending symbol variation games in the first starting port 21 with a suspended ball image. 1st starting hole 2nd holding ball image display area 26g, 1st starting hole 2nd holding ball image display area 26h, 1st starting hole 3rd holding ball image display area 26i, 1st starting hole 4th holding ball image 26 display area j and ( In FIG. 3, simply indicated as "g", "h", "i", and "j"), the number of pending symbols in the second starting port 22 is displayed as a pending ball image. 1 holding ball image display area 26k, second starting opening second holding ball image display area 26l, second starting opening third holding ball image display area 26m, second starting opening fourth holding ball image display area 26n (Fig. 3 , simply indicated as "k", "l", "m", and "n"), can be displayed. Also, a variation icon display area 26o (simply indicated as "o" in FIG. 3) for displaying an icon image corresponding to the symbol variation game currently being executed can be displayed.

The number of reservations displayed in the first starting opening reserved number image 26e and the number of reservations displayed in the first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26j is, in principle, synchronized (except when a command error or the like occurs), and the number of reservations displayed in the second start opening reservation number image 26f and the second start opening first reservation ball image display area 26k to the second In principle, it is synchronized with the number of reservations displayed in the starting port fourth reservation ball image display area 26n (except when a command error or the like occurs). For example, when "4" is displayed in the first starting opening reserved number image 26e, "4" is displayed in the first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. is displayed.

The number of reservations displayed as the first starting opening reservation number image 26e and the number of reservations displayed as the second starting opening reservation number image 26f may be hereinafter referred to as "number reservation". In addition, the first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g, the first starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first starting opening third reserved ball image display area 26i, the first starting opening fourth reserved ball image 26 display area j, second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k, second starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26l, second starting opening third reserved ball image display area 26m and the reserved ball image displayed in the second starting port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n may be referred to as a "reserved icon" below. Further, the icon image displayed in the variable icon display area 26o may be hereinafter referred to as "the variable icon". Also, the variable icon and the suspended icon may be collectively referred to simply as "icon".

In addition, the variation icon display area 26o, the first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g, the first starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first starting opening third reserved ball image display area 26i, the first Starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26j, second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k, second starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26l, second starting opening third reserved ball image display area 26m, Although the second starting port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n is displayed on the image display device 26, it is not limited to this, and may be displayed on an LED, a lamp, or the like. may be displayed on another display device (for example, a second image display device, a so-called "sub-liquid crystal").

The left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, the right decorative design image 26c, and the fourth design image 26d can display design images from "1" to "8", and are used for the special design hit determination process. If the judgment result is a hit, any combination of symbols "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", "666", "777", and "888" can be displayed. is.

In this embodiment, basically, if "special symbol A" and "special symbol E", which will be described later in FIG. is determined, the combination of symbols "333" can be displayed, and if "special symbol C" and "special symbol F" are determined, "111", "222", "444" and "555" are determined. ”, “666”, and “888” can be displayed.

Exceptionally, when "special symbol A" and "special symbol E" are determined, any of "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888" A combination of symbols may also be displayed. In this case, after the winning game is finished, the actual game state is the variable probability game state described later, but the appearance of the image display device 26 (background image, etc.) is the display of the time-saving game state described later. In this way, the player is made to expect the probability variable game state even in the time-saving game state without setting the time-saving game state=low probability state.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, it is possible to display a combination of symbols other than the combination of symbols described above. If it is a loss, in the special symbol variation pattern described later, when a special symbol variation pattern with "reach" is determined, for example, a combination of symbols such as "767" is confirmed and displayed, and a special symbol without "reach" is displayed. When the symbol variation pattern is determined, for example, a combination of symbols such as "765" is definitely displayed.

Note that "reach" means that the left decorative design image 26a and the right decorative design image 26c are displaying the same number image (temporary stop display), and the middle decorative design image 26b is being variably displayed (temporary display). The symbol image to be displayed stationary and the symbol image to be variably displayed are not limited to this), and in this embodiment, when the determination result of the "special symbol hit determination process" is a win, be sure to set "reach". Since it is configured to pass through, it can be said that the player can expect a winning game.

The fourth pattern image 26d may simply display a one-digit number or a two-digit number instead of combining the above-described patterns. You may enable it to identify the kind of , a loss, and a design.

(Regarding the pattern display device 27)
The pattern display device 27 is provided outside the game area (outside the outer rail member 18), which is an area different from the game area 7 of the game board 6. As shown in FIG. As also shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 displays a first special symbol which is controlled by the main control board 100 to execute a symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 21. A display 27a and a second special symbol display 27b for executing a symbol variation game based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 22 are provided. Here, the first special symbol display device 27a and the second special symbol display device 27b are composed of 7-segment display devices. symbol) flashes, and when it comes to the timing of deriving the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process, if it is a loss, "-" (horizontal bar symbol) is displayed (confirmed display), and if it is a hit, for example, " 7” is illuminated (confirmed display). In other words, the “special pattern” refers to a pattern whose display is controlled by the main control board 100 .

In the present embodiment, the "special design", the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, the right decorative design image 26c, and the fourth design image 26d are simply referred to as "design" or "identification design". It is sometimes called “information”. Also, the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, and the right decorative design image 26c managed by the effect control board 200 may simply be referred to as "decorative design". Also, the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, the right decorative design image 26c, and the fourth design image 26d managed by the effect control board 200 may be collectively referred to as "sub-designs".

Also, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is controlled by the main control board 100 to display the number of suspensions of the symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 21. A first special symbol suspension display 27c to be displayed and a second special symbol suspension display 27d to display the number of suspensions of the symbol variation game based on the game ball entering the second starting port 22 are provided. ing.

1st special design reservation indicator 27c, and 2nd special design reservation indicator 27d are each configured with two dot LED indicators, "turn off", "turn on", "flashing" by the number of can be displayed. For example, if the number of pending is '0' then both dot LED indicators are 'off', if the number of pending is '1' then one is 'on' and the other is 'off'. If the number of pending is "2", both are "lighting", and if the number of pending is "3", one is "lighting" and the other is "blinking", and the number of pending When it is "4", both are "blinking". In the following, the first special symbol holding indicator 27c and the second special symbol holding indicator 27d are indicated by "○", lighting is indicated by "●", and flashing is indicated by "◎". .

In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 27c includes the number of reservations displayed as the above-described first starting opening reservation number image 26e, and the first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first starting opening fourth In principle, in synchronization with the number of reservations displayed in the reservation ball image display area 26j (except when a command error or the like occurs), the second special symbol reservation display 27d is the above-described second start opening reservation number image 26f and the number of holds displayed as the second starting port first held ball image display area 26k to the second starting port fourth held ball image display area 26n are synchronized (command except when an error occurs). For example, when the first special symbol reservation display 27c both "blinks" (when the number of reservations is four), "4" is displayed as the first start opening reservation number image 26e, and the first start opening number "4" held ball images are displayed in the 1 held ball image display area 26g to the first start opening fourth held ball image display area 26j. In the following description, the first special symbol reservation display 27c and the second special symbol reservation display 27d may be referred to as "main reservation display".

In addition, although the 1st special design reservation indicator 27c and the 2nd special design reservation indicator 27d were each constituted by two dot LED indicators, it is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device whose display is controlled by the main control board 100 may be provided and displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 has a normal symbol display device which is controlled by the main control board 100 to execute a normal symbol variation game based on the passage of the game ball through the gate member 20. 27e is provided. The normal symbol display device 27e is composed of two dot LED display devices, and in the normal symbol variation game, from the start of variation, one is lit and the other is extinguished, one is extinguished and the other is lit. When it comes to the timing of deriving the determination result of the normal symbol hit determination process by repeatedly executing the mode of causing and the mode to cause, and when it comes to the timing of deriving the determination result of the normal symbol hit determination process, a final display is performed by lighting one if it is a loss and turning off the other. is turned off and the other is turned on.

Also, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is controlled by the main control board 100 to display the number of suspensions of the normal symbol variation game based on the passage of the game ball through the gate member 20. A normal symbol holding display 27f is provided. In addition, the normal design reservation display device 27f, like the above-described first special design reservation display device 27c and the second special design reservation display device 27d, is composed of two dot LED indicators, and the number of reservations Since the display mode of is also the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Also, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is controlled by the main control board 100 for display, and indicates the number of openings of the big winning opening 24 in the winning game described above. A round indicator 27g is provided for displaying "Number reference)". The round indicator 27g is composed of "4" dot LED indicators, which are provided for 5 rounds and 10 rounds, respectively, as shown in FIG. Then, for example, when the special pattern A wins, the LED display for 10 rounds lights up, and the others go out, and when the special pattern B hits, the LED display for 5 rounds. lights up and the others go out.

In addition, the game board 6 is provided with a plurality of board illumination devices 29 (for example, full-color LEDs). The decorativeness of the game machine 1 is enhanced. For example, the board illumination device 29 can decorate the entire game area 7 of the game board 6, as indicated by reference numeral 29 in FIG. Moreover, in order to make the display contents of the image display device 26 stand out, all the panel illumination devices 29 can be turned off. Further, the predetermined light emission pattern is composed of a plurality of light emission patterns that define the light emission speed, the color of light emitted, the LEDs that emit light and the LEDs that do not emit light, and the like.

Also, on the right side of the image display device 26 (so-called "center accessory"), a first special symbol sub-reserving display 29a and a second special symbol sub-reserving display 29b as one aspect of the board lighting device 29 are provided. and a right-handed indicator 29c. The first special symbol sub-reserving display device 29a and the second special symbol sub-reserving display device 29b are display-controlled by the effect control board 200, and each consist of two dot LED displays. It is possible to display the number of pending by "lighting" and "blinking". For example, if the number of pending is '0' then both dot LED indicators are 'off', if the number of pending is '1' then one is 'on' and the other is 'off'. If the number of pending is "2", both are "lighting", and if the number of pending is "3", one is "lighting" and the other is "blinking", and the number of pending When it is "4", both are "blinking". In the following, the first special symbol sub-holding display 29a and the second special symbol sub-holding display 29b are indicated by "○", lighting is indicated by "●", and flashing is indicated by "◎". There is

In addition, the first special symbol sub-holding display 29a includes the number of holdings displayed as the first starting opening holding number image 26e, and the first starting opening first holding ball image display area 26g to the first starting opening fourth holding. In principle, the number of reservations displayed in the sphere image display area 26j is synchronized (except when a command error or the like occurs), and the second special symbol sub-reservation display 29b is the second starting port reservation number image 26f. In principle, the number of reservations displayed is synchronized with the number of reservations displayed as the second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k to the second starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26n (command error, etc. (unless it occurs). For example, when both the first special symbol sub-reservation display 29a "blinks" (when the number of reservations is four), "4" is displayed as the first start opening reservation number image 26e, and the first start opening "4" held ball images are displayed in the first held ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth held ball image display area 26j. In the following, the first special symbol sub-suspension display 29a and the second special symbol sub-suspension display 29b may be referred to as "sub-suspension display".

Although the first special symbol sub-reserving display device 29a and the second special symbol sub-reserving display device 29b are each configured with two dot LED displays, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image may be displayed on a display device other than the image display device 26 (for example, a second image display device, a so-called "sub-liquid crystal").

The right-handed display 29c is display-controlled by the effect control board 200, for example, it lights up based on the reception of the opening command in the winning game, for example, the game state command (probability variable), the game state command (time reduction). Lights up based on what is received. As a result, the player can be urged to hit to the right. On the other hand, in the normal game state, it is turned off (turned off based on the reception of the game state command (normal)), thereby prompting the player to hit left.
The right-handed display 29c is extinguished so as to urge the player to play left-handed. It is also possible to encourage the player to hit left.

(Internal configuration of pachinko game machine 1)
Next, based on FIG. 4, the internal configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. It should be noted that the description of the configuration of the game board 6 in FIG. 3 will be omitted as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 has a main control board 100, an effect control board 200, a payout control board 300, and a power supply board 400 mounted behind the middle frame 3 (see FIG. 2). Then, as shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 only communicate one-way from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 via a harness or the like (not shown). are connected so that Also, the main control board 100 and the payout control board 300 are connected via a harness or the like so as to enable two-way communication. Also, the payout control board 300 is connected to the effect control board 200 so that only one-way communication is possible. In addition, the power supply board 400 receives supply of external power via a power plug (not shown), and sends the supplied external power to any of the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the payout control board 300. It is connected so that it can be supplied

In addition, the main control board 100 is connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., so that inputs from various switches can be made possible, and controls display of various displays and drive control of various solenoids. As possible, they are connected via harnesses, relay boards, or the like. In addition, the effect control board 200 is connected via a harness, a relay board, etc. so that input from various SW is possible, and a harness and so that display control to various displays is possible. They are connected via a relay board or the like.

(Regarding main control board 100)
The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs control processing related to the progress of the game, a main ROM 102 that stores a control program necessary for the control processing related to the progress of the game, and a main ROM 102 that stores a control program necessary for the control processing related to the progress of the game. A main RAM 103 is provided, which is readable and writable. Although not shown, it also includes an interrupt controller circuit that gives an interrupt signal to the main CPU 101, a hard random number generation circuit that generates random numbers within a certain range, and the like. It should be noted that control processing relating to the progress of the game in the main CPU 101 will be described in detail later with reference to flowcharts.

Further, the main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area (see FIG. 9) for managing various information. For example, a set value storage area for storing set value information, a special symbol state flag storage area for storing a special symbol state, a game state storage area for storing a game state, a winning state storage area for storing a state in a winning game, Normal design state flag storage area for storing the state of the normal design, normal design per state storage area for storing the state in the normal design per game, executed flag storage area for storing information that the time saving game state by the trigger 2 described later has been activated is mentioned.

The main RAM 103 is also provided with a counter (see FIG. 9) for managing various information (time and number of times). For example, a normal game state game number counter for counting (counting and storing) the number of times the symbol variation game is played in the normal game state, and a counter for counting (counting and storing) the number of times the symbol variation game is played in the time saving game state Time-saving game state game number counter, probability variable game state game number counter for counting (counting and storing) the number of times the pattern variation game is played in the probability variable game state, time management counter for managing various times, winning game There is a round number counter for managing the number of rounds.

The number-of-games counter may be used both as the number-of-games counter in the normal game state and as the number-of-games counter in the time-saving game state (it may be a counter of 1). In this case, the count may be started from the start of the time saving game state after the end of the winning game, and the counter value may be taken over even when the time saving game state ends and the normal game state is entered. For example, the counter value is "0" at the start of the time-saving game state after the end of the winning game, and the counter value is "100" when the time-saving game state is ended and the normal game state is entered. Then, when the counter value is determined to be "1000" at step S105-4-12-8 of the game state-specific processing described later, the processing may be affirmative.

(Regarding gate detection SW 20a)
The gate detection SW 20 a is provided inside the passage opening of the gate member 20 of the game board 6 and is a SW for detecting that the game ball has passed through the gate member 20 . In other words, the gate detection SW 20a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when the passage of the gaming ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. Become. Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) to which the detected information is input does not execute the normal symbol variation game in the normal symbol suspension display 27f, and the number of suspensions of the normal symbol variation game is "0". In the case of , immediately control to execute the normal symbol variation game, and when the number of suspension of the normal symbol variation game is "1" to "3", to suspend the execution of the normal symbol variation game , and when the number of suspensions of the normal symbol variation game is "4", control is performed so as not to suspend the execution of the normal symbol variation game.

(Regarding the first starting opening detection SW 21a)
The first starting opening detection SW21a is provided inside the winning opening of the first starting opening 21 of the game board 6, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the first starting opening 21. That is, the first starting hole detection SW21a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and when a game ball is detected to enter, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. will be Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which has received the detected information, causes the payout control board 300 to pay out three game balls as prize balls due to the game balls entering the first starting port 21. process.

Further, when an input is made from the first starting port detection SW 21a, the main control board 100 does not execute the symbol variation game on either the first special symbol display device 27a or the second special symbol display device 27b. And, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol reservation display 27c and the second special symbol reservation display 27d is "0", the first special symbol display 27a immediately executes the symbol variation game. When the number of suspensions of the symbol variation game in the first special symbol suspension display 27c is "1" to "3", control is performed to suspend the execution of the symbol variation game, and the first special symbol When the number of suspensions of the symbol variation game on the suspension display 27c is "4", the execution of the symbol variation game is controlled not to be suspended.

(Regarding the second start opening detection SW 22a)
The second starting opening detection SW22a is provided inside the winning opening of the second starting opening 22, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the second starting opening 22. That is, the second starting hole detection SW22a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and when a game ball is detected to enter, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. will be Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which has received the detected information, causes the payout control board 300 to pay out two game balls as prize balls due to the game balls entering the second starting port 22. process.

Further, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) executes the symbol variation game on both the first special symbol display device 27a and the second special symbol display device 27b when an input is made from the second starting port detection SW 22a. If not, and the number of reservations on the second special symbol reservation display device 27d is "0", immediately control the second special symbol display device 27b to execute the symbol variation game, When the number of suspensions of the symbol variation game on the 2 special symbol suspension display 27d is "1" to "3", control is performed to suspend the execution of the symbol variation game, and the second special symbol suspension display 27d When the number of suspensions of the symbol variation game is "4", the execution of the symbol variation game is controlled not to be suspended.

(Regarding the second start port opening/closing solenoid 22b)
The second starting port opening/closing solenoid 22b is provided behind the second starting port 22, and is a solenoid for causing the projecting member provided in the above-described second starting port 22 to perform an opening/closing operation. That is, the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 22b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc. When the determination is made, the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 22b is drive-controlled so as to open and close in the opening/closing mode shown in "Opening/closing mode of the second starting port" in FIG.

(Regarding normal winning hole detection SW 23a)
The normal winning hole detection SW23a is provided inside the winning hole of the normal winning hole 23 of the game board 6, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal winning hole 23. In other words, the normal winning hole detection SW 23a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the detected information is input to the main control board 100 when a game ball is detected to enter. will be Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which has received the detected information, instructs the payout control board 300 to pay out 8 game balls as prize balls due to the game balls entering the normal winning hole 23. process.

(Regarding the big winning opening detection SW 24a)
The big winning hole detection SW 24 a is provided inside the big winning hole 24 and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 24 . In other words, the big winning hole detection SW 24a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the detected information is input to the main control board 100 when a game ball is detected to enter. will be Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which receives the detected information, causes the payout control board 300 to pay out 12 game balls as prize balls due to the game balls entering the big winning hole 24. process. In addition, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101 ) transmits to the effect control board 200 a special prize winning command indicating that a game ball has entered the special prize opening 24 . As a result, the effect control board 200 can also recognize the entry state of the game ball into the big winning opening 24 .

(Regarding the grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 24b)
The large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 24b is provided behind the large winning opening 24, and is a solenoid for opening and closing the door provided in the large winning opening 24 described above. That is, the main control board 100 and the large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 24b are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc. In order to open and close the opening and closing door, the big winning opening opening and closing solenoid 24b is driven and controlled.

(Regarding the OUT port detection SW 25a)
The out port detection SW 25 a is provided inside the entrance of the out port 25 and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the out port 25 . In other words, the outlet detection SW 25a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the detected information is input to the main control board 100 when an entry of a game ball is detected. It will be. Thereby, the out number can be grasped in the main control board 100 .

(Regarding the first special symbol display 27a)
The first special symbol display device 27a is provided in the symbol display device 27, is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and is used to execute a symbol variation game based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 21. is an indicator of That is, the first special symbol display 27a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the symbol variation on the first special symbol display 27a. When the game execution condition is established, the display of the symbol variation game is controlled on the first special symbol display device 27a. It should be noted that the execution condition of the symbol variation game on the first special symbol display device 27a is established, the affirmative determination is made in the processing of step S105-2-4 in the "special symbol variation start time processing" (see FIG. 19) described later. case applies.

(Regarding the second special symbol display 27b)
The second special symbol display device 27b is provided in the symbol display device 27, is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and is used to execute a symbol variation game based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 22. is an indicator of That is, the second special symbol display 27b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the symbol fluctuation on the second special symbol display 27b. When the game execution condition is established, the display of the symbol variation game is controlled on the second special symbol display 27b. It should be noted that the fulfillment of the execution condition of the symbol variation game on the second special symbol display 27b means that the affirmative determination is made in the processing of step S105-2-1 in the "special symbol variation start processing" (see FIG. 19). Applicable.

(Regarding the first special symbol holding display 27c)
The first special symbol suspension display 27c is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is display-controlled by the main control board 100 to indicate suspension of the symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 21. A display for displaying numbers. That is, the first special symbol holding display 27c and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 detects the game ball from the first starting opening detection SW21a. , the display control of the first special symbol reservation indicator 27c is performed (turned off to light or turned on to flash) when the upper limit value (four pieces) of the hold is not reached. On the other hand, when the symbol variation game based on the game ball entering the currently varying first start port 21 is completed, the display control of the first special symbol reservation indicator 27c is performed (from blinking to lighting, or from lighting to extinguished). cause).

(Regarding the second special symbol holding display 27d)
The second special symbol pending display 27d is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is display-controlled by the main control board 100 to indicate the suspension of the symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 22. A display for displaying numbers. That is, the second special symbol holding display 27d and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 detects the game ball from the second starting opening detection SW 22a. is input, when the upper limit value (four pieces) of the reservation is not reached, the second special symbol reservation indicator 27d is displayed and controlled (turned off to light, or lighted to blink). On the other hand, when the symbol variation game based on the game ball entering the currently varying second starting port 22 is completed, the second special symbol reservation display 27d is displayed and controlled (from flashing to lighting, or from lighting to extinguished). cause).

(Regarding normal symbol display 27e)
The normal symbol display 27e is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is a display for executing a normal symbol variation game whose display is controlled by the main control board 100. FIG. That is, the normal symbol display 27e and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) executes the normal symbol variation game on the normal symbol display 27e. When the condition is satisfied, the normal symbol variation game is displayed and controlled on the normal symbol display 27e.

(Regarding the normal symbol holding display 27f)
The normal symbol suspension display 27f is provided in the symbol display device 27, is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and displays the number of suspensions of the normal symbol variation game based on the game ball passing through the gate member 20. It is a display for In other words, the normal symbol holding display 27f and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) receives the information that the game ball is detected from the gate detection SW 20a. When inputting, when the upper limit value (four pieces) of the reservation is not reached, the display of the normal design reservation indicator 27f is controlled (lighted from light or blinked from light). On the other hand, when the currently fluctuating normal symbol variation game ends, the display of the normal symbol reservation display 27f is controlled (from flashing to lighting or from lighting to extinguished).

(Regarding the round indicator 27g)
The round display device 27g is provided in the pattern display device 27, is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and is a display device for displaying the number of openings of the big winning opening 24 in the winning game described above. In other words, the round indicator 27g and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc. For example, when the symbol variation game determined as winning in the special symbol winning determination process ends, the first special symbol At the timing of displaying a special symbol (for example, "7") indicating a win on the display 27a, the lighting of the LED indicator of the number of rounds corresponding to the determined winning game is controlled. When the winning game is being executed, the round indicator 27g is continuously controlled to turn on, and when the winning game ends, the round indicator 27g is controlled to go out.

(Regarding the magnetic sensor 27h)
The magnetic sensors 27h are provided at a plurality of locations on the game board 6 and are sensors for detecting magnetism. That is, the magnetic sensor 27h and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like. It will be input to the control board 100 . Thereby, in the main control board 100, abnormal magnetism can be detected. Then, when the abnormal magnetism is detected, the information indicating the detection of the abnormal magnetism is transmitted to the performance control board 200. - 特許庁Thereby, it is possible to notify that an abnormal magnetism has been detected.

(Regarding the radio wave sensor 27i)
The radio wave sensors 27i are provided at a plurality of locations on the game board 6 and are sensors for detecting radio waves. That is, the radio wave sensor 27i and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like. It will be input to the control board 100 . As a result, abnormal radio waves can be detected in the main control board 100 . Then, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the information indicating the detection of the abnormal radio wave is transmitted to the performance control board 200.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to notify that an abnormal radio wave has been detected.

(About production control board 200)
As shown in FIG. 4, the effect control board 200 is provided with a effect control unit 200a. It has a sub-ROM 202 for storing, and a sub-RAM 203 capable of reading and writing necessary for the effect control processing. In addition, an image/sound control unit 200b connected to the performance control unit 200a via a harness or the like so as to enable two-way communication is provided. a sound ROM 205 for storing sound data; a CGROM 206 for storing image data; and a VRAM 207 having a frame buffer for storing image generation data and the like. Further, there is provided a light emission drive control section 200c which is connected to the production control section 200a via a harness or the like so as to enable two-way communication. a light emission drive ROM 209 that stores a control program necessary for the light emission control processing and the drive control processing; and a light emission drive RAM 210 that is capable of reading and writing necessary for the light emission control processing and the drive control processing. have.

Further, the effect control section 200a is connected so that operation information from the effect button detection SW 14a, operation information from the effect lever detection SW 15a, and operation information from the cross key detection SW 16a can be input.

(Regarding effect button detection SW 14a)
The effect button detection SW 14a is provided in the effect button 14, and is a SW for detecting that the effect button 14 is pressed by the player when the effect button 14 is in the operation effective period. That is, the effect button detection SW 14a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and information indicating that the effect button 14 has been pressed is input to the effect control board 200. there is Then, the effect control board 200 that receives the information indicating that the effect button 14 has been pressed controls the effect corresponding to the depression of the effect button 14 via the image display device 26 and the speaker 10 . Here, for the effect button 14, for example, in a symbol variation game, an operation valid period is set for a predetermined period of time, and the effect button detection SW 14a detects only depression when the operation valid period is set.

(Regarding the production lever detection SW 15a)
The effect lever detection SW 15a is provided in the effect lever 15, and is a SW for detecting that the effect lever 15 is operated by the player when the effect lever 15 is in the operation valid period. That is, the production lever detection SW 15a and the production control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and information indicating that the production lever 15 is operated is input to the production control board 200. there is Then, the effect control board 200 that receives the information indicating that the effect lever 15 has been operated controls the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect lever 15 via the image display device 26 and the speaker 10 . Here, for the effect lever 15, for example, in a symbol variation game, an operation valid period is set for a predetermined period of time, and the effect lever detection SW 15a detects only operations when the operation valid period is set.

(Regarding cross key detection SW 16a)
The cross-key detection SW 16a is provided on the cross-key button 16, and is a SW for detecting that the cross-key button 16 has been pressed by the player. That is, the cross key detection SW 16a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and information indicating that the cross key button 16 has been operated is input to the effect control board 200. ing.

As described above, by operating the cross key button 16, it is possible to adjust the amount of light emitted from the light emitting device 9, the amount of light emitted from the image display device 26, and the volume emitted from the speaker 10. Specifically, when the up button of the cross key button 16 is pressed, the amount of light can be increased (stepwise), and when the down button of the cross key button 16 is pressed, the amount of light can be decreased (step by step). When the right button of the cross key button 16 is pressed, the volume can be increased (stepwise), and when the left button of the cross key button 16 is pressed, the volume can be lowered (step by step).

The amount of light may be set in three stages of "strong", "medium", and "weak", or may be further divided into five stages. Also, the volume may be set in three stages of "high", "middle", and "low", or may be further set in five stages. Also, a level gauge image (see, for example, layer 3 in FIG. 38) indicating the degree of adjustment of the amount of light or volume may be displayed, or an adjustment sound corresponding to the level may be emitted. For example, when configuring the degree of volume adjustment in five stages, the adjustment sound corresponding to the lowest volume value level 1 is "do", and the adjustment sound corresponding to volume value level 2 is "re♪". The adjustment sound corresponding to level 3 may be "mi♪", the adjustment sound corresponding to volume value level 4 may be "fa♪", and the adjustment sound corresponding to maximum volume value level 5 may be "so♪".

It should be noted that the level gauge image may be displayed in a manner that matches the level of the amount of light or the volume, or may be displayed in a constant manner regardless of the level of the amount of light or the volume.
Specifically, the display mode in accordance with the amount of light and the volume level is, for example, the size (display area) of the level gauge image indicating the volume level 1, and the volume level 2, which is larger than the volume level 1. It is assumed that the size (display area) of the level gauge image indicating is displayed large (see FIG. 42, etc.).
On the other hand, the constant display mode regardless of the amount of light or the volume level is assumed to be a display in which the size (display area) of the level gauge image does not change whether the volume level is 1 or 2.

Further, the adjustment sound according to the stage may be configured to notify the current sound volume level by emitting a different sound for each stage.
Specifically, when the volume level is 1, the sound "Do♪" is emitted, when the volume level is 2, the sound "Re♪" is emitted, and when the volume level is 3, the sound "Mi♪" is emitted. is assumed to emit
As another example, it is also possible to make the sound "pi♪" sound uniformly at any stage, and to vary the volume value at each stage.
Specifically, when the volume level is 1, a sound "beep" is emitted at a volume value corresponding to the volume level 1, and when the volume level is 2, a volume value corresponding to the volume level 2 (more than the volume level 1) It is assumed that the sound "beep" is emitted at a large volume value).

In this embodiment, the adjustment of the amount of light and the adjustment of the sound volume can be performed when the symbol variation game is not being played. good. In this case, it is preferable to adjust without generating the level gauge image or adjustment sound, or by displaying in a small size and outputting the adjustment sound at a low volume. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect image and the effect sound corresponding to the symbol variation game from being hindered by the level gauge image and the adjustment sound.

An image display device 26 is connected to the image/sound control unit 200b so that image information generated by the image/sound control unit 200b can be displayed. A speaker 10 is connected to the image/sound control unit 200b so that sound information generated by the image/sound control unit 200b can be output.

(Regarding speaker 10)
As described with reference to FIG. 1, the speaker 10 can output voice and sound effects. For example, when information indicating the closed state is not input from the frame open detection SW 3a, which will be described later, a notification sound is output to indicate that the middle frame 3 is in the open state. That is, the speaker 10 and the image/sound control unit 200b are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the sound described above is output from the speaker 10 under the control of the image/sound control unit 200b.

The light emission drive control section 200c is also connected to the light emission device 9, the starting port light emission device 21a, and the board illumination device 29, so that light emission can be controlled by the light emission drive control section 200c. A board drive device 30 is connected to the light emission drive control section 200c, and the movable body 28 can be driven and controlled via the board drive device 30. FIG.

(Regarding movable body 28)
The movable body 28 is provided on the game board 6 and is capable of actions such as "falling", "rocking", and "rotating". By performing these actions, it suggests the possibility that a winning game will be awarded.

Further, when the movable body 28 receives the power-related subcommand, it confirms whether the above-described "dropping", "swinging", "rotating", etc. operations are performed normally in front of the display area of the image display device 26. It is designed to perform the initial operation for In the initial operation, the movable body 28 moves to the front of the display area of the image display device 26, so that the display content displayed in the display area becomes difficult to see for a certain period of time due to the movable body 28. FIG.
Note that the initial operation is performed at a position facing the display area of the image display device 26, and the movable body 28 does not move to a position facing the outside of the display area (outside the end of the display area). That is, even if the display content displayed in the display area becomes difficult to see due to the initial operation, other members (for example, the starting port light emitting device 21a, the first special symbol holding display 27c, the second special symbol holding display 27d, board illumination device 29, etc.) will not become difficult to see due to the initial movement of the movable body 28.

Although not shown, it also includes an interrupt controller circuit that gives an interrupt signal to the sub CPU 201, a hard random number generation circuit that generates random numbers within a certain range, and the like.

(Regarding payout control board 300)
As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 300 includes a payout CPU 301 for performing payout control processing, a payout ROM 302 for storing control programs necessary for the payout control processing, and reading and writing necessary for the payout control processing. A possible payout RAM 303 is provided. A payout device 304 is connected to the payout control board 300 via a harness or the like. By controlling the payout device 304, game balls are paid out to the upper tray 5a.

Specifically, in the main control board 100, for example, when the information that the game ball is detected from the first start hole detection SW21a described later is input, the main control board 100 is operated to pay out three prize balls. A payout command signal is transmitted to the payout control board 300, and the payout control board 300 receiving this controls the payout device 304 to pay out three prize balls to the upper tray 5a. When the payout of the three prize balls is completed, a payout completion signal is transmitted from the payout control board 300 to the main control board 100, and the information that the game ball is detected is inputted from the first start hole detection SW21a. Complete the payout of game balls for

Also, the discharge control board 300 is connected to the firing handle 8 via a harness or the like, and the firing handle 8 is gripped when the player touches the above-described handle touch sensor provided on the firing handle 8. The amount of rotation of the firing handle 8 is input according to the amount of the firing volume (not shown) provided on the firing handle 8 .

Also, the payout control board 300 is connected to a launcher 305 via a harness or the like, and by controlling the launcher 305 , game balls are launched into the game area 7 . Specifically, the payout control board 300 receives information that the player is gripping the shooting handle 8 from the shooting handle 8 and inputting the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 8 , and the shooting corresponding to the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 8 . The intensity controls the shooting device 305 to shoot a game ball.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 300 is connected to receive an input signal from the ball lending button 12 shown in FIG. When the lending button 12 is operated by the player, the payout control board 300 controls the payout device 304 so that the number of game balls corresponding to one operation of the lending ball button 12 (for example, 125 balls) is increased. is dispensed to the upper tray 5a.

(Regarding frame open detection SW3a)
The frame open detection SW3a is provided in the middle frame 3, and is used when the glass frame 4 is opened, when the glass frame 4 and the middle frame 3 are opened, or when the middle frame 3 is opened. It is possible to detect the "open" state, such as, and to detect the "closed" state when the glass frame 4 and the middle frame 3 are closed. In other words, the frame open detection SW 3a and the payout control board 300 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and information indicating the closed state is input to the payout control board 300 in the above-described "closed" state. will be On the other hand, when it is in the above-described "open" state, the information indicating the above-described closed state is not input to the payout control board 300, and by not inputting, the payout control board 300 (payout CPU 301) is in the above-described "open" state. can be detected to be in
Note that the payout control board 300 (payout CPU 301) can transmit information detected to be in the "closed" state and information detected to be in the "open" state to the effect control board 200.

(Regarding full tank detection SW 300a)
Between the upper receiving tray 5a and the lower receiving tray 5b, a passage is formed for guiding game balls that cannot be stored in the upper receiving tray 5a to the lower receiving tray 5b, and a full tank detection SW 300a is provided in the passage. there is When the game balls guided to the lower receiving tray 5b are stored without being discharged (to the outside of the game machine), the game balls are stopped in the passage, and when a predetermined amount of the game balls are stopped, the full tank detection SW 300a is turned ON. . As a result, it is possible to detect that the lower receiving tray 5b is also full of game balls.
When the full tank detection SW 300a is turned on, the payout CPU 301 stops the game ball payout by the payout device 304, and transmits information indicating that the full tank detection SW 300a is on to the effect control board 200. there is As a result, in the effect control board 200, it is possible to perform notification prompting discharge of the game balls stored in the lower receiving tray 5b.

(Regarding the power supply board 400)
As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the payout control board 300 are connected to the power supply board 400 via harnesses and the like, and as described above, the power supply plug (not shown). , the supplied external power is supplied to any of the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the payout control board 300. Although not shown, the power supply board 400 is provided with a conversion circuit or the like for converting external power (AC 100 volts) to DC 24 volts.

(Regarding the special symbol hit judgment table)
The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 5A is stored in the main ROM 102 . Here, in the present embodiment, six levels of setting values can be set, and FIG. 5A shows an example of a special symbol hit determination table for setting value 1. For example, when 1 is set as the set value, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol hit determination table for the set value 1 shown in (A) and performs special symbol hit determination processing. When it is set, the special symbol winning determination process is performed with reference to a special symbol winning determination table for each set value (not shown). In addition, common to the first start port and the second start port means that even if the game ball enters the first start port 21, even if the game ball enters the second start port 22, the special symbol to be referred to It shows that the decision table is common. Note that the set value is not limited to "6" stages, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, "4" stages or "2" stages may be used. Alternatively, only the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 5A may be provided without setting values.

In the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. 5 (A), when the game state is the normal game state and when it is the time saving game state, the probability of being determined to be hit in the special symbol hit determination process is "1. /319", the probability of being determined to be lost is "318/319", and when the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the special symbol winning determination process is "1/ 32”, the probability of being determined to be lost is “31/32”. That is, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, the probability of being determined to be hit varies about 10 times than the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state, so the probability variation gaming state is the normal gaming state or the time saving game It can be said that the game state is more advantageous for the player than the state.

In the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. 5A, the hit determination probability is as described above, but in the special symbol hit determination table with other set values (not shown), the special symbol hit determination process The probability of being judged as a hit is different. For example, in the special symbol hit determination table for the set value "6", when the game state is the normal game state and when it is the time-saving game state, the probability of being determined as a hit in the special symbol hit determination process is At "1/280", the probability that it is determined to be lost is "279/280", and when the game state is a variable game state, the probability that it is determined to be a hit in the special symbol hit determination process is " 1/28", the probability of being determined to be lost is "27/28". In this way, by enabling different hit probabilities to be set for each set value, it becomes easier for the amusement arcade to manage the put-out balls.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state, as compared to the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 5 (B) described later and FIG. Since it is easy to win and an advantageous opening and closing mode is selected as the opening and closing mode of the projecting member of the second start port 22 when hitting a win, the variable probability game state is the most advantageous game state for the player, Next, the time-saving game state is a game state advantageous to the player, and the normal game state is the most disadvantageous game state for the player.

In this embodiment, the gate member 20 is provided on the right side of the game area 7 and not provided on the left side of the game area 7, as shown in FIG. If, in the normal game state, the game ball is hit to the right and the game ball is passed through the gate member 20, as shown in FIG. The protruding member can be opened, but since the opening time is "0.9 s", it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second start hole 22, and most of the game balls that are hit out the out hole 25. will pass through.
Therefore, in the normal game state, hitting to the left and entering the game ball into the first start hole 21 is the optimum game for the player.
Therefore, when the gate detection SW 20a detects a game ball in the normal game state, a left-handed notification (see FIG. 40) is performed to prompt the player to play an optimum game.

In the following, the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state may be collectively referred to as a low probability state, and the variable probability gaming state may be referred to as a high probability state. In addition, the normal gaming state may be referred to as non-shortening or non-shortening state, or state A, and the probability variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are collectively referred to as variable shorting or variable shorting state. Or, it may be called a ball entry rate improved state, or a state B.

(Regarding normal pattern hit judgment table)
The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 5B is stored in the main ROM 102 . Then, when the game state is the normal game state, the probability that it is determined as winning in the normal symbol winning determination process is "4/256", and the probability that it is determined as losing is "252/256". , When it is a time-saving game state and when it is a variable probability game state, the probability that it is determined to be hit in the normal symbol hit determination process is "251/256", and the probability that it is determined to be lost is "5/256". ”. Therefore, compared to the normal game state, in the case of the time-saving game state or the probability variable game state, it is easier to determine that it is a win in the normal symbol win determination process, and it can be said that it is an advantageous game state for the player. . Although no set value is provided in the normal symbol hit determination table, a set value may be set in the same manner as the special symbol hit determination table. For example, the set value "6" may be easier to hit in the normal symbol hit determination than the set value "1".
Further, in the normal game state, the probability of being determined to be hit in the normal symbol winning determination process is set to "4/256", and the probability of being determined to be lost is set to "252/256", but the present invention is not limited to this. , the probability of being determined to be lost may be set to "256/256".

In addition, in this embodiment, for convenience, the state of the normal design in the normal game state is set to "state A", and the state of the normal design in the time saving game state and the variable probability game state is set to "state B".
Then, in the time-saving gaming state, the state is "state B" until the symbol variation game is played 100 times, and in the probability variable gaming state, the state is "state B" until the next winning game occurs.

(About the special design decision table)
The special symbol determination table of FIG. 6(A) shows the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed based on the game ball entering the first start hole 21, and the case of winning and the case of losing. (1) a table for the first starting port 21 and a game ball entering the second starting port 22, which is referred to when determining a special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the first special symbol display 27a; As a result of the special symbol hit determination processing being performed, it is referred to when determining the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the second special symbol display 27b depending on whether it is a win or a loss. , which are stored in the main ROM 102 . Then, the main CPU 101 refers to the table corresponding to the starting hole into which the game ball entered, and determines the special symbol based on the determination result of the special symbol winning determination process.

Then, in the special symbol determination table of (1) in FIG. 6A, as a result of performing the special symbol winning determination process, if the result is a winning, the main CPU 101 determines "special symbol A", "special symbol B". , and "special symbol C", any one of the special symbols is determined. Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and any special symbol is determined by referring to the acquired random number for special symbol determination. . For example, if the obtained random number for determining the special symbol is "0 to 9", "special symbol A" is determined, and if the random number for determining the acquired special symbol is "10 to 64", "special symbol B" is determined. is determined, and if the acquired random number for special symbol determination is "65 to 99", "special symbol C" is determined. Then, when the special symbols are determined, the "number of rounds to be provided" and the "game state after winning" are determined uniquely. When the "special symbol A" is determined, 10 rounds are given as the "number of given rounds", and a probability variable game state is given as the "game state after winning". Further, when "special symbol B" is determined, 5 rounds are given as the "number of given rounds", and a probability variable game state is given as the "game state after winning". Further, when the "special symbol C" is determined, 10 rounds are given as the "number of given rounds", and a time-saving game state is given as the "game state after winning". On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines the "special symbol D", and the "special symbol D" contains the "number of rounds to be given" and the "game after winning". Since "state" is not defined, no winning game is provided.

In addition, in the special symbol determination table of (2) in FIG. 6A, when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is a winning, the main CPU 101 determines "special symbol E", "special symbol F". , determine one of the special symbols. A specific determination method is the same as (1) in FIG. Then, for example, if the acquired random number for determining the special symbol is "0 to 64", "special symbol E" is determined, and if the random number for determining the acquired special symbol is "65 to 99", "special symbol Determine F. When the "special symbol E" is determined, 10 rounds are given as the "number of given rounds", and a probability variable game state is given as the "game state after winning". Further, when the "special symbol F" is determined, 10 rounds are given as the "number of given rounds", and a time-saving game state is given as the "game state after winning". On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol win determination processing is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines "special symbol G".

Thus, the rate at which the probability variation gaming state is given is the first start port 21 "65%", the second start port 22 is also "65%", so the rate of entering the probability variation gaming state , there is no difference between the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22 . On the other hand, as for the "number of rounds given", 10 rounds are always given to the second start port 22, and 5 rounds are never given, so a winning game is given based on the ball entering the first start port 21. It can be said that giving a winning game based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 22 is advantageous for the player, rather than doing so. In this embodiment, no set value is provided in the special symbol determination table, but a set value may be provided. For example, the determination ratio of the special symbols may differ between when the set value is "1" and when the set value is "6". In that case, the rate of entry into the variable probability gaming state is common to all set values, but the "number of rounds to be granted" may be set to have different rates for each set value. For example, the number of advantageous rounds may be more likely to be given when the set value is "6", or the number of more advantageous rounds may be more likely to be given when the set value is "1".

Thus, it is more advantageous for the player to be awarded a winning game based on the ball entering the second starting hole 22 than to be awarded a winning game based on the ball entering the first starting hole 21.例文帳に追加Therefore, in a time-saving game state or a variable probability game state in which the second start port 22 can be opened at "1.8S x 3 times", the game ball is entered to the second start port 22 by hitting to the right. It is the most suitable game for the player to let it go.
Therefore, when the first start hole detection SW21a detects the game ball in the time-saving game state or the variable probability game state, a right-handed notification (see FIG. 41) is performed to prompt the player to play an optimum game.

(Regarding normal design decision table)
The normal symbol determination table in FIG. 6B is stored in the main ROM 102, and when the normal symbol hit determination process is performed based on the passing of the game ball through the gate member 20, the normal symbol wins. It is a table to be referred to when determining a normal symbol to be fixedly displayed on the normal symbol display 27e in the case of normal symbol loss. When the game state is the normal game state, and as a result of performing the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol determination process performed in the normal symbol related process "normal symbol A ”, and if it is a normal pattern loss, determine “normal pattern B”. In addition, when the game state is the time-saving game state and when the game state is the variable probability game state, as a result of performing the normal symbol hit determination process, if it is a normal symbol hit, in the normal symbol related process "Normal symbol C" is determined in the normal symbol determination process to be performed, and "normal symbol D" is determined when the normal symbol is lost.

It should be noted that, in the normal symbol as well, the content to be provided is uniquely determined, as in the above-described special symbol. When "normal pattern A" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting port 22 opens "1" time at "0.9S", and when "normal pattern B" is determined, the second starting port 22 projecting member does not open. Further, when the "normal symbol C" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting port 22 is opened "3" times at "1.8S", and when the "normal symbol D" is determined, the second The projecting member of the starting port 22 does not open. Therefore, compared to the normal game state, the time saving game state and the variable probability game state are more advantageous when the opening and closing mode of the projecting member of the second start port 22 is advantageous. , it can be said that the game state is advantageous for the player.

In addition, although the setting value is not provided in the normal symbol determination table, the setting value may be provided similarly to the special symbol determination table. For example, for each set value, the probability that it is determined to be a normal pattern hit in the normal pattern hit determination process may be different, and in the case of the set value "6", it is easier to hit than in the case of the set value "1". It may be, or vice versa. Moreover, the opening/closing mode of the second starting port 22 may be different for each set value. For example, in the case of the set value "6", it may be opened and closed in an opening and closing manner that is more advantageous than in the case of the set value "1", or vice versa.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the details of the winning special symbol. "Special symbol A", "Special symbol C", "Special symbol E", and "Special symbol F" open the opening/closing door of the big winning port 24 for 29.5 seconds per round, and 10 game balls enter. When 29.5 S elapses before the ball is detected or the entry of 10 game balls is detected, the opening/closing door of the big winning opening 24 is closed. Then, when the closing interval time 2S elapses, the next round is started, and this is repeated for 10 rounds. It should be noted that, after the 10 rounds are completed, the winning game ending (for example, 10S) is entered.

"Special pattern B" is that the opening and closing door of the big winning port 24 is opened 29.5 seconds per round, and the entry of 10 game balls is detected, or before the entry of 10 game balls is detected. After 29.5 seconds have passed, the opening/closing door of the big winning opening 24 is closed. Then, when the closing interval time 2S elapses, the next round is started, and this is repeated for 5 rounds. In addition, after the end of 5 rounds, the winning game ending (for example, 10S) is shifted to. Although not shown, there is no set value difference for the round opening/closing mode.

(About the special symbol variation pattern table)
The special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 8 is stored in the main ROM 102 and is a table referred to when determining the variation time in the symbol variation game. When the game state is the normal game state, the main CPU 101 selects one of "variation pattern 1" to "variation pattern 5" when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss. Determining fluctuation patterns. Specifically, when the game ball enters the first start port 21 or the second start port 22, obtain a random number for determining the variation pattern, and refer to the obtained random number for determining the variation pattern. , determine the variation pattern. Although not shown, when the game ball enters the first start port 21 or the second start port 22, a reach determination random number is acquired, and the reach determination random number corresponds to the random number for executing reach. When doing so, determine one of the variation patterns from "variation pattern 2" to "variation pattern 5", and if the reach determination random number does not correspond to the random number for executing reach, determine "variation pattern 1" You may do so. On the other hand, when the game state is the normal game state, the main CPU 101 refers to the random number for determining the variation pattern if the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is a win, and "variation pattern 6" to "variation pattern 6". One of the fluctuation patterns is determined from among the "variation patterns 11".

Then, when the variation pattern is determined, the “details of presentation” and the “variation time” (seconds S) are uniquely determined. When "variation pattern 1" is determined, "normal variation" is determined as the "description", and "7S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, "normal fluctuation" refers to fluctuation that does not reach reach. Further, when "variation pattern 2" is determined, "normal reach" is determined as the "description", and "15S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, "normal reach" refers to a reach that does not perform a special development effect (for example, once a temporary stop display is performed in the event of a failure, and then the effect of changing the middle decorative pattern image 26b) is performed. Since the selection rate at time is low and the selection rate at the time of loss is high, it is positioned as a reach with low expectations for winning.

Further, when "variation pattern 3" is determined, "super reach" is determined as the "description", and "40S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, "super reach" refers to a reach in which a development effect is performed during the execution of reach (normal reach), and a real image is displayed on the image display device 26 at the development destination, for example, and the selection ratio at the time of winning. is higher than "normal reach", and the selection ratio at the time of loss is lower than "normal reach", so it is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation than "normal reach".

Further, when "fluctuation pattern 4" is determined, "pseudo run 2 normal reach" is determined as the "description", and "50 s" is determined as the "variation time". In addition, although "pseudo consecutive" will be described in detail later, "pseudo consecutive 2 normal reach" has a higher expectation of winning than only "normal reach", and a reach with a lower expectation of winning than "super reach" Positioned as Further, when "fluctuation pattern 5" is determined, "pseudo run 3 super reach" is determined as the "effect content", and "70S" is determined as the "variation time". "Pseudo-ream 3 super reach" is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of winning than only "super reach". In addition, "variation pattern 6" to "variation pattern 9" are different from "variation pattern 2" to "variation pattern 5" only in losing or winning, and the contents of the effect and the variation time are the same, so the explanation is omitted. do.

Further, when "fluctuation pattern 10" is determined, "pseudo-run 4 super reach" is determined as the "effect content", and "90S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, "pseudo-run 4 super reach" is a variation pattern that is selected only in the case of winning, so when "pseudo-run" described later is performed four times, winning is determined at that time. Further, when "fluctuation pattern 11" is determined, "full rotation reach" is determined as the "description", and "120 seconds" is determined as the "variation time". Here, the "full rotation reach" means that the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, and the right decorative design image 26c are "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", This is a reach that scrolls (changes display) while arranging "666", "777", and "888", and finally displays, for example, "777".

In addition, the selectable variation pattern in the case of winning may be defined by the determined special symbol. For example, the variation patterns 6 to 10 can be selected even if any of the special symbol A, the special symbol B, and the special symbol C is determined, and the variation pattern 11 is selected when the special symbol A is determined. It is possible to select as many as possible.
Moreover, even when any of the special symbols A, B, and C is determined, the variation patterns 6 to 11 may be selectable.

In addition, the main CPU 101, when the game state is the time-saving game state and when the variable probability game state, as a result of the special symbol winning determination processing, if the result is a loss, "variation pattern 12" to " One of the variation patterns is determined from among the variation patterns 15. When "variation pattern 12" is determined, "reduced variation" is determined as the "description", and "2S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, the "shortening variation" refers to variation in which the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, and the right decorative design image 26c are stopped simultaneously, and the game state is the time-saving game state. And when it is in the probability variation gaming state, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is performed, and if it is a loss, this "shortening variation" is likely to be selected, so the time saving gaming state and , The variable game state can be efficiently digested.

Further, when "fluctuation pattern 13" is determined, "stretching reach" is determined as the "description", and "10S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, the "ready-to-win" is, for example, by temporarily stopping and displaying the "7" symbol as the left decorative symbol image 26a and by prompting whether or not to temporarily stop and display the 7 symbol as the right decorative symbol image 26c. It is a production that incites whether or not reach is formed. As a result of "ready-to-win", for example, when 8 symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, no ready-to-win is formed, and for example, when 7 symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c. Reach is formed, and develops into “variable short medium super reach” in “variation pattern 15” and “variation pattern 17” described later.

Further, when "variation pattern 14" is determined, "super reach in variable short time" is determined as the "description", and "30S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, "super reach during variable short time" is a "super reach" dedicated to the time saving game state and probability variable game state, and is different from the "super reach" performed in the normal game state.

Further, when the "variation pattern 15" is determined, the "description content" is determined as "stretching reach → variable short medium super reach", and the "variation time" is determined as "40S". "Variation pattern 16" and "Variation pattern 17" are different from "Variation pattern 14" and "Variation pattern 15" only in losing or winning. . In addition, the selection rate of "Reach Influence → Variable Short Medium Super Reach" is higher than "Variable Short Medium Super Reach" at the time of winning, and the selection ratio at the time of losing is lower than "Variable Short Medium Super Reach". Therefore, it is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of winning than “variable short medium super reach”.

The special symbol variation patterns described above are not limited to those shown in FIG. 8, and may further include a plurality of special symbol variation patterns. For example, even in the normal game state, "shortening variation" (2S) may be provided. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern table referred to by the number of reserved balls of the symbol variation game of the first start port 21 may be changed, or the special symbol variation pattern table referred to by the number of reserved balls of the symbol variation game of the second start port 22 may be changed. The symbol variation pattern table may be changed. For example, in the case of losing, when the number of reserved balls is 4, it is easier to select "normal fluctuation" of "variation pattern 1" than when the number of reserved balls is 1, and the game is improved. You may make it improve operation.

In addition, when a loss is determined in the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state, and as a result of starting the symbol variation game of the second starting port 22, when the number of reserved balls of the second starting port 22 becomes 0, For example, it is possible to select the 0:00 normal variation (losing) consisting of 30S and secure the time for the game ball to enter the second starting port 22 .

Also, the special symbol variation pattern table to be referred to may be changed depending on the set value. For example, a special symbol variation pattern that is easy to select for each set value may be provided, or a special symbol variation pattern that can be selected only by the set value may be provided. As a result, it is possible to guess (or comprehend) what the set value is from the effect contents of the executed special symbol variation pattern, which leads to an improvement in game interest.

(Determination information storage area of main RAM, counter of main RAM, storage area of main RAM)
FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a determination information storage area (reserved storage area) provided in the main RAM 103, a counter of the main RAM, and a storage area of the main RAM.

As described above, the main RAM 103 is provided with (A) a reserved storage area corresponding to special symbols and (B) a reserved storage area corresponding to normal symbols. Determination information (random value) related to the special symbol can be stored in each of the "variable storage area", "first storage area", "second storage area", "third storage area", and "fourth storage area". , Also in the second start port 22, the "variable storage area", the "first storage area", the "second storage area", the "third storage area", and the "fourth storage area" are each determined according to the special symbol. Information (random value) can be stored. ” can store the determination information (random number value) relating to each normal symbol.
Note that the counter of the main RAM and the storage area of the main RAM are as described above, so descriptions thereof will be omitted here.

(Regarding control processing performed by the main CPU 101)
Control processing performed by the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 23. FIG.

(Regarding main processing on the main control board)
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the main processing performed in the main control board 100. As shown in FIG. This processing is started by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on and voltage is supplied from the power supply board 400 to each control board.

(Step S1)
In step S1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage (power outage state). As a result, if the power is interrupted (power outage state), the process of step S1 is repeatedly executed, and if the power is not interrupted (power outage state), the process proceeds to step S2. It should be noted that during a power outage (power outage state), the process can be executed using a backup power supply (not shown).

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 101 prohibits interrupts. As a result, the main CPU 101 executes only the process of FIG. 10 until the interrupt is permitted in S18, which will be described later. Then, when the interrupt is prohibited, the process proceeds to step S3.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 105 is ON (depressed). That is, it is determined whether the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (the power switch 400a is turned on) while the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed. As a result, when the RAM clear switch 105 is ON, the process proceeds to step S4, and when the RAM clear switch 105 is not ON, the process proceeds to step S9.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change key is at the setting change position. For example, when it is detected that the setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and that the setting change key is rotated by 90 degrees, it is determined that the setting change key is at the setting change position. If not, it is determined that the setting change key is not at the setting change position. As a result, if the setting change key is in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S5, and if the setting change key is not in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S7.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 101 performs set value change processing shown in FIG. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 11 . Then, when the set value changing process is completed, the process proceeds to step S6.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 101 transmits a power-on command. The power-on command is a command indicating that the RAM clear switch 105 is turned on and the power is turned on. The device 26 displays the message "power is being turned on", and the speaker 10 outputs the voice "power is being turned on". Then, when the power-on command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S17.

(Step S7)
In step S7, the main CPU 101 initializes areas 1 and 2 of the main RAM 103 (excluding the set value storage area) when the RAM clear switch 105 is ON and the power switch 400a is ON. As a result, for example, if the game is in the time-saving game state when the amusement arcade closes, it can be started from the normal game state when the amusement arcade opens the next day. In this process, each game number counter shown in FIG. 9 is also cleared (the counter value is set to 0). Also, if the executed flag in the executed flag storage area shown in FIG. 9 is ON, it is turned OFF. After initializing the areas 1 and 2 of the main RAM 103 (excluding the setting value storage area), the process proceeds to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 101 transmits a power-on command. Then, when the power-on command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S17.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change key is at the setting change position. As a result, when the setting change key is in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S10, and when the setting change key is not in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S11.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 12 . Then, when the set value confirmation process is completed, the process proceeds to step S11.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is backed up data. For example, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off, a backup process (not shown) is performed to hold data, store a checksum, and turn on a backup flag. If the backup flag is ON, it is determined that there is backed up data, and if the backup flag is not ON, it is determined that there is no backed up data. As a result, when there is backed up data, the process proceeds to step S12, and when there is no backed up data, it is determined that the power is turned on for the first time, and the process proceeds to step S17.

(Step S12)
In step S<b>12 , the main CPU 101 calculates the checksum of the area of the main RAM 103 . After calculating the checksum of the area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S13.

(Step S13)
In step S13, the main CPU 101 determines whether the checksum of the area of the main RAM 103 is normal. For example, it is determined whether the checksum value stored in the backup process (not shown) matches the checksum value calculated in step S12. If they match, the checksum is determined to be normal. , the checksum is determined to be incorrect. As a result, when the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S15, and when the checksum is not normal, the process proceeds to step S14.

(Step S14)
In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs game stop processing (error setting). Specifically, an error command for performing error notification using the light emitting device 9, the speaker 10, the image display device 26, etc. is transmitted to the effect control board 200, or the setting value change processing of FIG. 11 is not performed. For as long as possible, a process is performed that makes it impossible to cancel the error. Then, the process remains as long as the set value change process of FIG. 11 is not performed.

(Step S15)
In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs return processing. That is, the state before the power failure state is restored normally. When the state before the power failure state is restored normally, the process proceeds to step S16.

(Step S16)
In step S16, the main CPU 101 transmits a power restoration command. The power restoration command is a command indicating that the RAM clear switch 105 has been turned off and the power has been restored. The device 26 displays "Power supply is being restored", and the speaker 10 outputs the voice "Power supply is being restored". Then, when the power restoration command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S17.

(Step S17)
In step S17, the main CPU 101 sets CTC. That is, the CTC (counter timer circuit), which has the function of creating a pulse output with a constant period and the function of time measurement, etc., is set so that the main control board timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically performed every 4 ms. , set the time constant register of the CTC. After setting the CTC, the process proceeds to step S18.

(Step S18)
At step S18, the main CPU 101 permits an interrupt. Then, when the interrupt is permitted, it waits, and after that, main control board timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed every 4 ms.

(Regarding setting value change processing)
FIG. 11 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S5 of the main control board main process) showing the set value changing process performed in the main control board 100. FIG. Note that the state in which the processing of FIG. 11 is being performed corresponds to the above-described "setting change state".

(Step S5-1)
In step S5-1, the main CPU 101 initializes the area of the main RAM 103 (excluding the set value storage area). In this process, each game number counter shown in FIG. 9 is also cleared (the counter value is set to 0). Also, if the executed flag in the executed flag storage area shown in FIG. 9 is ON, it is turned OFF. Then, after initializing the areas of the main RAM 103 (excluding the set value storage area), the process proceeds to step S5-2.

(Step S5-2)
In step S5-2, the main CPU 101 transmits a set value changing command. The setting value changing command is a command indicating that the setting value is being changed, and when the effect control board 200 receives the command, the image display, for example, is performed via the image/sound control unit 200b. The device 26 displays "setting change in progress", and the speaker 10 outputs the voice "setting change in progress". Then, when the set value changing command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S5-3.

(Step S5-3)
At step S5-3, the main CPU 101 reads out the current set value and displays it on the display 104. FIG. For example, if the set value stored in the set value storage area of the main RAM 103 is "1", the display 104 displays "1". Then, when the current set value is read out and displayed on the display 104, the process proceeds to step S5-4.

(Step S5-4)
At step S5-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a set value change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON. If the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the process proceeds to step S5-5, and if the RAM clear switch 105 is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S5-7.

(Step S5-5)
At step S5-5, the main CPU 101 performs processing for changing the setting value. For example, when the set value is "1" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "2", and when the set value is "2" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "3", and when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON when the set value is "3", the set value is changed to "4", and when the set value is "4", the RAM clear switch 105 is turned on When it is turned ON, the set value is changed to "5", and when the set value is "5" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "6", and when the set value is "6" When the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON at this time, the set value is changed to "1". After changing the set value, the process proceeds to step S5-6.

(Step S5-6)
In step S5-6, the main CPU 101 displays the changed set value on the display 104 (for example, the rightmost segment). For example, if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON when the set value "1" is displayed, the set value "2" is displayed, and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON when the set value "2" is displayed. Then, the set value "3" is displayed, and if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "3" is being displayed, the set value "4" is displayed and the set value "4" is displayed. If the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value is displayed, the set value "5" is displayed, and if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "5" is displayed, the set value "6" is displayed If the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "6" is displayed, the set value "1" is displayed. Then, when the changed set value is displayed on the display 104, the process proceeds to step S5-7.

(Step S5-7)
At step S5-7, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a set value confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting change key is at a position (vertical direction) rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from a position (horizontal direction) rotated clockwise 90 degrees. Then, if the setting value confirmation operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S5-8, and if the setting value confirmation operation is not performed, the process proceeds to step S5-4.

(Step S5-8)
In step S5-8, the main CPU 101 stores the set value in the set value storage area of the main RAM 103. FIG. That is, when a desired set value is displayed on the display 104 and the setting change key is turned counterclockwise by 90 degrees (vertical direction), the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is determined. become. As a result, subsequent games are played based on the stored set values. After the set value is stored in the set value storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S5-9.

(Step S5-9)
At step S5-9, the main CPU 101 makes the display 104 non-display. That is, the set value displayed on the display 104 in step S5-6 is hidden. Then, when the display 104 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S5-10.

(Step S5-10)
At step S5-10, the main CPU 101 transmits a set value information command. The setting value information command is a command indicating information about the setting value. When the effect control board 200 receives the command, the effect control board 200 stores the information about the setting value in the sub-RAM 203, and executes a setting value suggesting effect described later. The setting value information stored in the sub RAM 203 is referred to. In addition, when the production control board 200 receives the command, it terminates the above-described notification such as "the setting is being changed". Then, when the set value information command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S6 of the main control board main process.

(Regarding setting value confirmation processing)
FIG. 12 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S10 of the main control board main process) showing the set value confirmation process performed in the main control board 100. FIG. It should be noted that the state in which the processing in FIG. 12 is being performed corresponds to the "setting confirmation state" described above.

(Step S10-1)
In step S10-1, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value checking command. The setting value checking command is a command indicating that the setting value is being checked. Upon receiving the command, the effect control board 200 performs image display via the image/sound control unit 200b, for example. The device 26 is displayed to indicate that "settings are being checked", and the speaker 10 is made to output a voice saying that "settings are being checked". Then, when the set value checking command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S10-2.

(Step S10-2)
At step S10-2, the main CPU 101 reads out the current set value and displays it on the display 104. FIG. For example, if the set value stored in the set value storage area of the main RAM 103 is "1", the display 104 displays "1". Then, when the current set value is read out and displayed on the display 104, the process proceeds to step S10-3.

(Step S10-3)
In step S10-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether an end operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting change key is at a position (vertical direction) rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from a position (horizontal direction) rotated clockwise 90 degrees. Then, if the end operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S10-4, and if the end operation is not performed, the process is looped until the end operation is performed.

(Step S10-4)
At step S10-4, the main CPU 101 makes the display 104 non-display. That is, the set value displayed on the display 104 in step S10-2 is hidden. When the display 104 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S10-5.

(Step S10-5)
In step S10-5, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value confirmation end command. The setting value confirmation end command is a command indicating that the setting value confirmation process has ended, and when the effect control board 200 receives the command, the above-described notification such as "setting is being confirmed" is terminated. Then, when the setting value confirmation end command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S11 of the main control board main process.

(Regarding main control board timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the main control board timer interrupt processing performed in the main control board 100. As shown in FIG. This processing is executed by interrupting the above-described main control board main processing periodically (for example, every 4 ms).

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 101 saves information stored in the register. After saving the information stored in the register, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 101 performs time management processing for updating the timer used in the game (for example, opening time of the big winning opening 24, etc.). After updating the timer used in the game, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random numbers such as the random numbers for winning determination, the random numbers for determining special symbols, and the random numbers for determining variation patterns. When various random number updating processes are completed, the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S104)
At step S104, the main CPU 101 detects an input from each switch shown in FIG. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 14 . Then, when an input from each SW is detected, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to special symbols. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 18 . Then, when the process related to the special symbol ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to normal symbols. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate member 20, the "normal symbol hit determination process" is performed, and the normal symbol determination and normal symbol fluctuation time are determined. Then, when the process related to the normal symbol ends, the process proceeds to step S107.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to the payout of game balls. For example, in the input SW detection process of step S104, when the entry of a game ball is detected, a payout command signal is sent to the payout control board 300 to pay out the corresponding prize ball. A payout command signal is set in the command transmission area of , and a payout completion signal is received from the payout control board 300 . Then, when the process related to the payout of game balls is completed, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs abnormality determination processing. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 23 . After completing the abnormality determination process, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S109)
In step S<b>109 , the main CPU 101 performs processing of transmitting various commands to the effect control board 200 . For example, in this process, the main CPU 101 checks whether a command is set in the command transmission area provided on the main control board 100, and if the command is set, controls the effect of the set command. It is transmitted to the board 200 and the payout control board 300 . Then, when the command transmission process ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 101 controls display of special symbols (variation display and confirmation display) in the first special symbol display 27a when the symbol variation game is based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 21. ) is performed, and in the case of the symbol variation game based on the game ball entering the second starting port 22, display control (variation display and final display) of special symbols is performed on the second special symbol display 27b. Also, based on the fact that the game ball has entered each starting port and the symbol variation game in each starting port has ended, the first special symbol reservation display 27c and the second special symbol reservation display 27d is also displayed. Then, when the display control of the special symbols is completed, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol display control (variable display and fixed display) on the normal symbol display 27e. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate member 20 and the fact that the normal symbol variation game has ended, the display control of the normal symbol reservation display 27f is also performed. Then, when the display control of the normal symbols is completed, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 101 performs game performance information management processing. Specifically, the game performance information is calculated by the above-described formula of "(the number of game balls paid out in the normal game state / the number of outs in the normal game state) x 100", and the calculated game performance information is displayed on the display device 104. is displayed. When the game performance information management process ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 101 restores the information saved in step S101 to the register. Then, when the saved information is returned to the register, the main control board timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Regarding input switch detection processing)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process) showing the input switch detection process performed in the main control board 100. FIG.

(Step S104-1)
In step S104-1, the main CPU 101 performs a first start port detection process. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 15 . Then, when the process at the time of detection of the first starting port ends, the process proceeds to step S104-2.

(Step S104-2)
In step S104-2, the main CPU 101 performs processing when detecting the second start port. Note that this process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 16 . Then, when the process at the time of detection of the second starting opening is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-3.

(Step S104-3)
In step S104-3, the main CPU 101 receives the information that the game ball has been detected from the normal winning hole detection SW 23a, and causes the payout control board 300 to pay out eight game balls as prize balls. A process of setting a payout command signal in a command transmission area for payout is performed. Further, as described above, when a game ball enters the normal winning hole 23 in a winning game, the normal winning hole entering ball is sent to the command transmission area in order to notify the ball entry using the speaker 10 and the image display device 26. Set the detection signal. Then, when the normal winning hole detection process is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-4.

(Step S104-4)
In step S104-4, the main CPU 101 receives the information that the game ball has been detected from the big winning hole detection SW 24a, and causes the payout control board 300 to pay out 12 game balls as prize balls. A process of setting a payout command signal in a command transmission area for payout is performed. Also, in order to notify that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 24 using the image display device 26 or the like, a big winning hole ball detection signal is set in the command transmission area. Notification using the image display device 26 or the like means that, for example, when more than 10 game balls per round are detected by the large winning opening detection SW 24a (also referred to as over winning), the image display device 26 notifies that fact. The notification may be given by display or by sound from the speaker 10 (for example, the sound of "pillin"). Then, when the big winning opening detection process is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-5.
It should be noted that the notification of the over-winning is not limited to the sound of the speaker 10, but may be the light-emitting device 9, the display of a specific character on the image display device 26, or the production button 14. Alternatively, the production lever 15 may be vibrated by a vibrating device.

(Step S104-5)
In step S104-5, the main CPU 101 performs a pass gate detection process. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 17 . Then, when the passage gate detection processing is completed, the processing proceeds to step S104-6.

(Step S104-6)
In step S104-6, the main CPU 101 performs processing when information indicating that a game ball has been detected is input from the out-hole detection SW 25a. For example, in order to transmit the out-port passage command to the effect control board 200, the out-port passage command is set in the command transmission area. Then, when the out-port detection processing is completed, the processing moves to step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding processing when detecting the first starting port)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S104-1 of the input switch detection process) showing the first start opening detection process performed in the main control board 100. As shown in FIG.

(Step S104-1-1)
At step S104-1-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the information indicating that the game ball has been detected has been input from the first starting opening detection SW 21a. Then, when the information that the game ball has been detected from the first starting hole detection SW21a is input, the processing is shifted to step S104-1-2, and the game ball entering is detected from the first starting hole detection SW21a. If the information has not been input, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input switch detection process.

(Step S104-1-2)
In step S104-1-2, the main CPU 101 transmits a payout command to cause the payout control board 300 to pay out three game balls as prize balls in response to the game balls entering the first starting port 21. Set the prize ball command in the region. Then, when the prize ball command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-1-3.

(Step S104-1-3)
In step S104-1-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether the "fourth storage area" is stored. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of pending symbol variation games at the first start port 21 is "4". If the "fourth storage area" is stored, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input switch detection process, and if the "fourth storage area" is not stored, step S104-1- 4 is processed.

(Step S104-1-4)
At step S104-1-4, the main CPU 101 acquires a random value for hit determination. The random number value acquired in the process is used in the later-described winning determination process (step S104-1-8) and special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19). Then, when the hit determination random number value is obtained, the process proceeds to step S104-1-5.

It should be noted that the random number value for hit determination may be obtained before step S104-1-3. Then, if it is determined in step S104-1-3 that the "fourth storage area" has been stored, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-5)
At step S104-1-5, the main CPU 101 acquires a special symbol determination random number value. The random number value acquired in the process is used in the later-described winning determination process (step S104-1-8) and special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19). Then, when the special symbol determination random number value is obtained, the process proceeds to step S104-1-6.

It should be noted that the acquisition of the special symbol determination random number value may be performed before step S104-1-3. Then, if it is determined in step S104-1-3 that the "fourth storage area" has been stored, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-6)
At step S104-1-6, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern. The random number value acquired in the process is used in the later-described winning determination process (step S104-1-8) and special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19). Then, when the random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern is obtained, the process proceeds to step S104-1-7.

It should be noted that the random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern may be obtained before step S104-1-3. Then, if it is determined in step S104-1-3 that the "fourth storage area" has been stored, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-7)
In step S104-1-7, the main CPU 101 stores the hit determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value value as determination information in an empty storage area. For example, if the "third storage area" is stored and the "fourth storage area" is empty, each random value is stored in the "fourth storage area". After each random value is stored in a free storage area, the process proceeds to step S104-1-8.

(Step S104-1-8)
At step S104-1-8, the main CPU 101 performs a winning determination process. This winning judgment process is a process for judging whether or not the random number acquired in step S104-1-4 is a hit prior to the special symbol winning judgment process in the special symbol variation start time process (see FIG. 19). be. As a result, for example, if the hit determination random number value stored in the "fourth storage area" in step S104-1-7 is a hit, the notice effect ("prefetch effect" described later) is performed across a plurality of fluctuations. can be executed. When the winning determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-1-9.

(Step S104-1-9)
In step S104-1-9, the main CPU 101 sets the first starting opening winning command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the first starting opening winning command to the effect control board 200. FIG. In addition, the first start opening winning command also includes information on the determination result of the winning determination process in step S104-1-8, and the effect control board 200 receives the command to determine the winning time. It is possible to recognize whether the judgment result of the process is a win or a loss. Then, when the first start opening winning command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-1-10.

(Step S104-1-10)
In step S104-1-10, the main CPU 101 sets the reserved storage area specification command in the command transmission area in order to send the reserved storage area specification command to the effect control board 200. FIG. The reserved storage area designation command is a command indicating the storage status of the determination information storage area (reserved storage area) of the main RAM 103. For example, if only the variable storage area is stored, "0""1" if stored up to the storage area, "2" if stored up to the second storage area, "3" if stored up to the third storage area, and stored up to the fourth storage area. If the command contains information such as "4". As a result, even in the effect control board 200, the storage status of the determination information storage area (reserved storage area) of the main RAM 103 can be recognized. Then, when the reserved storage area designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input switch detection process.

(Step S104-1-11)
In step S104-1-11, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state. Specifically, in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, it is determined whether "1" indicating the time-saving game state or "2" indicating the probability variable game state is stored. And, if the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, the process proceeds to step S104-1-12, and if the current gaming state is not the time-saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, the input SW The process proceeds to step S104-2 of the detection process.

(Step S104-1-12)
In step S104-1-12, the main CPU 101 sets the left-handed error designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the left-handed error designation command to the effect control board 200. FIG. That is, if you hit left in the time-saving gaming state or the probability variable gaming state and enter the game ball into the first start port 21, you will be notified of a left-handed error (for example, by display and voice saying "Please hit right") notification) will be performed. Then, when the left-hand hitting error designation command is set, the processing shifts to step S104-2 of the input SW detection processing.
In addition, when the gate member 20 is provided also in the first game area 7a, the game ball to the gate member 20 is set without setting the left-handed error designation command by entering the game ball into the first start port 21. A left hitting error designation command can be set by passing the .

(Regarding the process when detecting the second starting port)
FIG. 16 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S104-2 of the input switch detection process) showing the second start opening detection process performed in the main control board 100. As shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 16 differs from FIG. 15 only in the start port, but the basic processing content is the same, so the description will be omitted as appropriate.

(Step S104-2-1)
In step S104-2-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the information indicating that the game ball has been detected has been input from the second start opening detection SW 22a. Then, when the information that the game ball has been detected from the second start hole detection SW22a is input, the process proceeds to step S104-2-2, and the game ball entry is detected from the second start hole detection SW22a. If the information has not been input, the process proceeds to step S104-3 of the input switch detection process.

(Step S104-2-2)
In step S104-2-2, the main CPU 101 transmits a payout command to cause the payout control board 300 to pay out two game balls as prize balls in response to the game balls entering the second starting port 22. Set the prize ball command in the region. Then, when the prize ball command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-2-3.

(Step S104-2-3)
In step S104-2-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the "fourth storage area" is stored. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of pending symbol variation games at the second starting port 22 is "4". Then, if the "fourth storage area" is stored, the process proceeds to step S104-3 of the input switch detection process, and if the "fourth storage area" is not stored, step S104-2- 4 is processed.

(Step S104-2-4)
At step S104-2-4, the main CPU 101 acquires a random value for hit determination. Then, when the hit determination random number value is obtained, the process proceeds to step S104-2-5.

(Step S104-2-5)
At step S104-2-5, the main CPU 101 obtains a special symbol determination random number value. Then, when the special symbol determination random number value is obtained, the process proceeds to step S104-2-6.

(Step S104-2-6)
At step S104-2-6, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern. Then, when the random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern is obtained, the process proceeds to step S104-2-7.

(Step S104-2-7)
In step S104-2-7, the main CPU 101 stores the hit determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value value as determination information in an empty storage area. After each random value is stored in a free storage area, the process proceeds to step S104-2-8.

(Step S104-2-8)
At step S104-2-8, the main CPU 101 performs a winning determination process. When the winning determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-2-9.

(Step S104-2-9)
In step S104-2-9, the main CPU 101 sets the second starting opening winning command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the second starting opening winning command to the effect control board 200. FIG. Then, when the second start opening winning command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-2-10.

(Step S104-2-10)
In step S104-2-10, the main CPU 101 sets the reserved storage area specification command in the command transmission area in order to send the reserved storage area specification command to the effect control board 200. FIG. Then, when the reserved storage area designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-3 of the input switch detection process.

(Regarding processing when passing gates are detected)
FIG. 17 is a flow chart (subroutine of step S104-5 of input switch detection process) showing the process at the time of passage gate detection performed in the main control board 100. As shown in FIG.

(Step S104-5-1)
At step S104-5-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not information indicating that the game ball has been detected has been input from the gate detection SW 20a. Then, when the information that the game ball has been detected is input from the gate detection SW20a, the processing is shifted to step S104-5-2, and the information that the game ball has been detected is input from the gate detection SW20a. If not, the process proceeds to step S104-6 of the input switch detection process.

(Step S104-5-2)
In step S104-5-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the "fourth storage area" is stored. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of suspensions of the normal symbol variation game is "4". Then, if the "fourth storage area" is stored, the process proceeds to step S104-6 of the input switch detection process, and if not, step S104-5- The processing is shifted to 3.

(Step S104-5-3)
At step S104-5-3, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for normal symbol hit determination. Then, when the normal symbol winning determination random number value is obtained, the process proceeds to step S104-5-4.

(Step S104-5-4)
At step S104-5-4, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for normal symbol determination. Then, when the normal symbol determination random number value is obtained, the process proceeds to step S104-5-5.

Incidentally, acquisition of the normal symbol determination random number value may be performed before step S104-5-4. Then, if it is determined in step S104-5-2 that the "fourth storage area" has been stored, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-5-5)
In step S104-5-5, the main CPU 101 acquires a normal symbol variation pattern determination random number value. Then, when the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number value is obtained, the process proceeds to step S104-5-6.

(Step S104-5-6)
In step S104-5-6, the main CPU 101 stores the random number value for normal symbol hit determination, the random number value for normal symbol determination, and the random number value for normal symbol variation pattern determination in an empty storage area as determination information. . After each random value is stored in a free storage area, the process proceeds to step S104-5-7.

(Step S104-5-7)
In step S104-5-7, the main CPU 101 sets the general pattern reservation increase command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the normal pattern reservation increase command to the effect control board 200. And, when you set the normal figure hold increase command, the process proceeds to step S104-5-8.

(Step S104-5-8)
In step S104-5-8, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol reserved storage area designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the normal symbol reserved storage area designation command to the effect control board 200. Then, when the normal design reservation storage area specification command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-5-9.

(Step S104-5-9)
At step S104-5-9, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is the normal game state. Specifically, it is determined whether “0” indicating the normal game state is stored in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103 . Then, when the current game state is the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S104-5-10, and when the current game state is not the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S104-6 of the input SW detection process. Migrate processing.

(Step S104-5-10)
In step S104-5-10, the main CPU 101 sets the right-handed error designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the right-handed error designation command to the effect control board 200. FIG. That is, when the game ball is hit to the right in the normal game state and the game ball is passed through the gate member 20, a notification regarding a hitting error to the right (for example, a display and voice notification saying "Please hit to the left") is performed. Become. Then, when the right hitting error designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-6 of the input switch detection process.

(Regarding special symbol related processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt process) showing the special symbol related processing performed in the main control board 100. FIG.

(Step S105-1)
In step S105-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 stores a flag indicating that the game is stopped. For example, when the main CPU 101 starts the variation of the special symbol, it sets a value “1” indicating that the special symbol status flag is being varied (step S105-2-16 in FIG. 19 to be described later). When stopping the variation of the symbols, the value "0" indicating that the game is stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area (step S105-4-3 in FIG. 20 described later). After setting the value "0" indicating that the game is stopped, the value "2" indicating the winning game is set in the case of winning. Then, if the value "0" indicating that it is stopped is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2, and if the value "0" indicating that it is stopped is not set, the process proceeds to step S105-3. to migrate.

(Step S105-2)
In step S105-2, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation start processing shown in FIG. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 19 . Then, when the special symbol variation start time processing is completed, the processing is shifted to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-3)
In step S105-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 stores a flag indicating that the game is changing. Then, when the value "1" indicating that it is fluctuating is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4, and if the value "1" indicating that it is fluctuating is not set, the process proceeds to step S105-5. to migrate.

(Step S105-4)
In step S105-4, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol changing process shown in FIG. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 20 . Then, when the special symbol fluctuation process is completed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5)
In step S105-5, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value "0" indicating that it is stopped is not set and that the value "1" that indicates that it is fluctuating is not set, the winning game is set, and the winning game process shown in FIG. 22 is performed. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 22 . Then, when the winning game process is completed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding special symbol fluctuation start processing)
FIG. 19 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S105-2 of special symbol related processing) showing the special symbol variation start time processing performed in the main control board 100. FIG.

(Step S105-2-1)
In step S105-2-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a hold in the hold storage area of the symbol variation game corresponding to the second start port 22 provided in the main RAM 103. FIG. Then, if there is a hold corresponding to the second start port 22, the process proceeds to step S105-2-2, and if there is no hold corresponding to the second start port 22, the process proceeds to step S105-2-4. to migrate.

(Step S105-2-2)
In step S105-2-2, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the number of pending of the second starting port 22. FIG. As for the subtraction, as described in the above-mentioned "Regarding the second start port 22", after sliding the determination information (random value) of the "variable storage area" to the "fourth storage area", Emptying the storage area of "1" corresponds to this. Along with this, the display of the second special symbol reservation display 27d also changes to a display mode (from "blinking" to "lighting" or from "lighting" to "lighting out") according to the number of reservations. Then, when "1" is subtracted from the number of suspensions of the second starting port 22, the process proceeds to step S105-2-3.

(Step S105-2-3)
In step S105-2-3, the main CPU 101 sets the second start opening subtraction command in the command transmission area in order to subtract the number of reservations managed by the effect control board 200. FIG. Then, when the second start opening subtraction command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-8.

(Step S105-2-4)
In step S105-2-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a hold in the hold storage area corresponding to the first start port 21 provided in the main RAM 103. FIG. Then, if there is a hold corresponding to the first start port 21, the process proceeds to step S105-2-5, and if there is no hold corresponding to the first start port 21, the process proceeds to step S105-2-7. to migrate.

(Step S105-2-5)
In step S105-2-5, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the number of reservations of the first starting port 21. FIG. Regarding the subtraction, as described in the above-mentioned "Regarding the first start port 21", after sliding the determination information (random value) of the "variable storage area" to "fourth storage area", Emptying the storage area of "1" corresponds to this. Along with this, the display of the first special symbol reservation display 27c also becomes a display mode (from "blinking" to "lighting" or from "lighting" to "lighting out") according to the number of reservations. Then, when "1" is subtracted from the number of reservations of the first starting port 21, the process proceeds to step S105-2-6.

(Step S105-2-6)
In step S105-2-6, the main CPU 101 sets the first start opening subtraction command in the command transmission area in order to subtract the number of reservations managed by the effect control board 200. FIG. Then, when the first start port subtraction command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-8.

(Step S105-2-7)
In step S105-2-7, the main CPU 101 displays "waiting for customer" on the image display device 26 when there is neither a hold corresponding to the second start port 22 nor a hold corresponding to the first start port 21. To display the screen, set the customer waiting command in the command transmission area. Then, when the customer waiting command is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

The "waiting for customers" screen includes, for example, sub-symbols confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation game that was completed immediately before, the background image that was displayed in the symbol variation game that was completed immediately before, and the variation icon display. Area 26o, first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g to first starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26j (the second starting opening reserved ball image display area may also be included) are displayed. For example, it is a state in which an image or the like is additionally displayed to notify that adjustment of the volume or the amount of light is possible. Then, when a predetermined time elapses in "waiting for customer", "demonstration effect" is executed. In addition, in the "demonstration effect", the sub-symbols and background images displayed in "waiting for customers", the variable icon display area 26o, the first start opening first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start opening The fourth reserved ball image display area 26j (the second starting opening reserved ball image display area may also be included), the first starting opening reserved number image 26e, and the second starting opening reserved number image 26f are not displayed, for example, The entire display area is used to display the model name and manufacturer name. Then, when a predetermined period of time elapses in the "demonstration effect", it becomes "waiting for customers" again.

(Step S105-2-8)
In step S105-2-8, the main CPU 101 sets the reserved storage area specification command in the command transmission area in order to send the reserved storage area specification command to the effect control board 200. FIG. Then, when the reserved storage area designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-9.

(Step S105-2-9)
In step S105-2-9, after performing step S105-2-2, when the main CPU 101 reaches the relevant process, the determination information (random value) acquired and stored in the second start opening detection process is stored. On the other hand, after performing step S105-2-5, if the process is reached, the determination information (random value) acquired and stored in the first start opening detection process is used to number) is hit determination information (random value). Furthermore, the main CPU 101 determines a special symbol based on the determination result. For example, if it is determined that the determination information (random value) acquired and stored in the first start opening detection process is a hit, one of the special symbols A to C is determined, and when the first start opening is detected If it is determined that the determination information (random number value) acquired and stored in the process is wrong, the special symbol D is determined. Then, when the special symbol hit determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S105-2-10.

(Step S105-2-10)
At step S105-2-10, the main CPU 101 updates the number-of-games counter in the main RAM 103 according to the game state. For example, if the current game state is the normal game state, the normal game state game number counter is "+1", and if the current game state is the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state game number counter is "-1". Then, if the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming state game number counter is incremented by "+1". This makes it possible to recognize that one symbol variation game has been played. It should be noted that the probability variation gaming state game number counter does not necessarily need to be provided. Also, the configuration of addition and subtraction is merely an example, and may be changed as appropriate (addition may be changed to subtraction, or subtraction may be changed to addition). After updating the number-of-games counter corresponding to the game state, the process proceeds to step S105-2-11.

(Step S105-2-11)
At step S105-2-11, the main CPU 101 sets a game number counter command. Specifically, in order to transmit the value of the game number counter after updating in the process of step S105-2-10 to the effect control board 200, the game number counter command is set in the command transmission area. When the number-of-games counter command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-12.

(Step S105-2-12)
In step S105-2-12, the main CPU 101 sets the symbol designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control board 200. FIG. For example, in step S105-2-9, when the special symbol D is determined, a symbol specifying command indicating that it is the special symbol D is set. Then, when the pattern designating command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-13.

(Step S105-2-13)
At step S105-2-13, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol variation pattern in the symbol variation game. Then, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S105-2-14.

(Step S105-2-14)
At step S105-2-14, the main CPU 101 designates a special symbol variation pattern in the command transmission area in order to transmit a command indicating the special symbol variation pattern determined at step S105-2-13 to the effect control board 200. set command. For example, when "variation pattern 9" is determined in step S105-2-13, a special symbol variation pattern designation command indicating "variation pattern 9" is set. Then, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-15.

(Step S105-2-15)
At step S105-2-15, the main CPU 101 sets the time management counter of the main RAM 103 to the variation time (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined at step S105-2-13. For example, when "fluctuation pattern 9" is determined, the fluctuation time "70 seconds" is set. After setting the variable time, the process proceeds to step S105-2-16.

(Step S105-2-16)
At step S105-2-16, the main CPU 101 sets a value “1” indicating that the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 is in a state of fluctuation. Thereby, it can be recognized that the special symbol is changing. Also, in this process, subtraction of the fluctuation time set in step S105-2-15 is started. Then, in the special symbol state flag storage area, when the value "1" indicating that it is fluctuating is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

In the description of FIG. 19 above, if there is the determination information of the second start port 22 in step S105-2-1, the special symbol hit determination process is executed with priority over the first start port 21. The special symbol hit determination process may be executed in the order in which the ball is entered into the first starting hole 21 and the second starting hole 22.例文帳に追加

(Regarding processing during special symbol fluctuation)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S105-4 of the special symbol related process) showing the special symbol changing process performed in the main control board 100. As shown in FIG.

(Step S105-4-1)
In step S105-4-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the set variable time has elapsed in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. FIG. For example, when "fluctuation pattern 9" is determined and "70S" is set, it is determined whether "70S" has passed. Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-4-2, and when the special symbol variation time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process. to migrate.

(Step S105-4-2)
In step S105-4-2, the main CPU 101 transmits a symbol stop command for stopping the sub-symbols being variably displayed on the image display device 26 to the effect control board 200. Set stop command. Then, when the symbol stop command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-3.

(Step S105-4-3)
In step S105-4-3, the main CPU 101 sets a value "0" indicating that the game is stopped in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. FIG. Thereby, it can be recognized that the special symbol is stopped. Then, when the value "0" indicating that the game is stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S105-4-4.

(Step S105-4-4)
At step S105-4-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of determination at step S105-2-9 in FIG. 19 is winning. Then, if it is a win, the process proceeds to step S105-4-5, and if it is not a win, the process proceeds to step S105-4-12.

(Step S105-4-5)
At step S105-4-5, the main CPU 101 sets a value “2” indicating a winning game in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. FIG. Thereby, it can be recognized that it is a winning game. Then, in the special symbol state flag storage area, when the value "2" indicating the winning game is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-6.

(Step S105-4-6)
At step S105-4-6, the main CPU 101 clears the gaming state. For example, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state as it is, if the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the normal gaming state, if the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, usually Enter the game state. As a result, during the winning game, the state of the normal pattern becomes "state A (see FIG. 5)", the game ball enters only the second start opening 22 during the winning game, and the game ball enters the big winning opening 24. It is possible to prevent a player from suffering a loss without hitting a ball. Then, when the gaming state is cleared, the process proceeds to step S105-4-7.

(Step S105-4-7)
At step S105-4-7, the main CPU 101 clears each game number counter. That is, when a winning game is won, each game number counter shown in FIG. 9 is cleared (the counter value is set to 0) before starting the winning game. When each game number counter is cleared, the process proceeds to step S105-4-8.

(Step S105-4-8)
In step S105-4-8, the main CPU 101 turns off the executed flag in the storage area of the main RAM 103. FIG. In addition, the executed flag is a flag indicating that the process of shifting to the time-saving game state in FIG. 21 described later has been performed. Then, when the executed flag is turned off in the storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S105-4-9.

(Step S105-4-9)
At step S105-4-9, the main CPU 101 shifts to a winning opening to inform that a winning game has started. For example, in the winning state storage area of the main RAM 103, the state of the winning game is stored. Set to '2' if it is an interval between rounds and '3' if it is an ending. Then, when the game is shifted to the winning opening, the process shifts to step S105-4-10.

(Step S105-4-10)
In step S105-4-10, the main CPU 101 sets the hit opening command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the win opening command for executing the effect corresponding to the opening of the winning game to the effect control board 200. . Then, when the winning opening command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11.

(Step S105-4-11)
At step S105-4-11, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the opening of the winning game (for example, “10 seconds”) in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. FIG. Then, when the time corresponding to the winning opening is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-12)
At step S105-4-12, the main CPU 101 performs the processing by game state shown in FIG. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 21 . Then, when the game state-specific processing ends, the processing shifts to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding processing by game state)
FIG. 21 is a flow chart (subroutine of step S105-4-12 of the special symbol changing process) showing the processing by game state performed in the main control board 100. FIG.

(Step S105-4-12-1)
In step S105-4-12-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” indicating the time-saving gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103 . And, if the current game state is the time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-12-2, if the current game state is not the time-saving game state, step S105-4-12-6 to process.

(Step S105-4-12-2)
In step S105-4-12-2, the main CPU 101 updates the time-saving game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. FIG. Specifically, the time-saving game state game number counter is "-1". Then, when the time-saving game state game number counter is updated, the process proceeds to step S105-4-12-3.

(Step S105-4-12-3)
At step S105-4-12-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the updated counter value is 0 as a result of updating the time-saving game state game number counter at step S105-4-12-2. Then, if the updated counter value is 0, the process proceeds to step S105-4-12-4, and if the updated counter value is not 0, step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process. to process.

(Step S105-4-12-4)
At step S105-4-12-4, the main CPU 101 changes the game state to the normal game state. Specifically, "0" is stored in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate the normal game state. Then, when the game state is changed to the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-12-5.

(Step S105-4-12-5)
In step S105-4-12-5, the main CPU 101 transmits a game state command (normal) to the effect control board 200 to transmit the game state command (normal) indicating the normal game state. Set to area. Then, when the game state command indicating the normal game state is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-12-6)
At step S105-4-12-6, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is the normal game state. Specifically, it is determined whether “0” indicating the normal game state is stored in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103 . When the current game state is the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-12-7, and when the current game state is not the normal game state, step S105-4-12-16. to process.

(Step S105-4-12-7)
At step S105-4-12-7, the main CPU 101 updates the normal game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. FIG. Specifically, the number-of-games counter in the normal game state is incremented by "1". Then, when the normal game state game number counter is updated, the process proceeds to step S105-4-12-8.
Note that the update is basically performed in both the symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 21 and the symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 22. It is possible.

(Step S105-4-12-8)
At step S105-4-12-8, the main CPU 101 determines whether the updated counter value is "1000" as a result of updating the normal game state game number counter at step S105-4-12-7. Then, if the updated counter value is "1000", the process proceeds to step S105-4-12-9, and if the updated counter value is not "1000", the main control board timer interrupt The process proceeds to step S106 of the process.

(Step S105-4-12-9)
At step S105-4-12-9, the main CPU 101 determines whether the executed flag is ON. Specifically, the execution completion flag storage area of the main RAM 103 is referenced, and if the execution completion flag storage area is "0", it is determined to be OFF, and if it is "1", it is determined to be ON. If the executed flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process, and if the executed flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S105-4-12-10. do.

(Step S105-4-12-10)
At step S105-4-12-10, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to the time-saving game state. Specifically, "1" is stored in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate the time saving game state. When the game state is set to the time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-12-11.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the normal game state game number counter reaches "1000" in the normal game state, the normal game state is shifted to the time saving game state. Note that the normal game state game number counter is cleared, for example, at step S105-4-7 in FIG. When it is done (unfavorable situation for the player), it is arranged to shift to the time-saving game state as a remedy. As a result, "1000" times becomes one criterion, and it is possible to reduce the number of players who continue playing the game endlessly.

It should be noted that the transition to the time-saving gaming state in this process may be referred to as "opportunity 2" or "time-saving gaming state operated (transitioned) by opportunity 2" hereinafter.

In addition, in the normal game state, after the normal game state game number counter reaches "1000" and the state is shifted to the time-saving game state, the symbol variation game is played continuously "1000" times without winning the winning game again. When (conveniently "2000" times), the transition to the time-saving game state is not performed there (similarly after that). In other words, it is positioned as a one-time relief measure in a disadvantageous situation for the player. In order to implement such a one-time remedy, the above-described executed flag is provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal game state game number counter that shifts to the time-saving game state is set to "1000" as an example, but it is not limited to this and can be set to any value. For example, it may be "300" or "500". Moreover, the number of times may be small, such as "50", "10", or "1". However, instead of providing multiple types of values, only a predetermined single value is provided. As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to understand even for players who are unfamiliar with games.

In addition, the value of the normal game state game number counter that shifts to the time saving game state is, for example, a value derived from the hit determination probability ("1/319" in FIG. 5(A)) shown in FIG. may be For example, if the hit determination probability is "1/319", the value of the normal game state game number counter that will shift to the time-saving game state is set to "950" (about three times the probability denominator), and the hit determination probability is If it is "1/199", the value of the number-of-games counter in the normal game state that shifts to the time-saving game state may be configured to be "600" (approximately three times the probability denominator).

Further, when setting values of multiple stages are provided as described above, the value of the normal game state game number counter that shifts to the time-saving game state may be common to all set values. For example, even when the set value is 1 and when the set value is 6, the value of the normal game state game number counter that shifts to the time saving game state may be set to "1000". As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from blindly continuing the game without knowing which set value is set, and it is possible to clarify the target such as "1000" times regardless of what set value is set. can.

On the other hand, when setting values in multiple stages as described above, the value of the normal game state game number counter that shifts to the time-saving game state may be varied for each set value. For example, when the set value is 1, it may be set to "1000", and when the set value is 6, it may be set to "600". As a result, the set value can be grasped from the number of games that shift to the time-saving game state, so that attention is paid to the number of games to shift to the time-saving game state, leading to an improvement in game interest.

(Step S105-4-12-11)
In step S105-4-12-11, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103 to "100". That is, in the normal game state, if the symbol variation game is played continuously "1000" times without winning the winning game (disadvantageous situation for the player), "100" time-saving game state is provided as a remedy. will be When "100" is set in the time-saving game state game number counter, the process proceeds to step S105-4-12-12.

(Step S105-4-12-12)
At step S105-4-12-12, the main CPU 101 turns on the executed flag in the storage area of the main RAM 103. FIG. When the executed flag is turned ON, the process proceeds to step S105-4-12-13.

(Step S105-4-12-13)
At step S105-4-12-13, the main CPU 101 sets the executed command in the command transmission area in order to make the effect control board 200 recognize that the executed flag is ON. In addition, the effect control board 200 can execute the notification effect corresponding to the executed command, when receiving the executed command. Details of the notification effect will be described later. Then, when the executed command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-12-14.

(Step S105-4-12-14)
In step S105-4-12-14, the main CPU 101 transmits a game state command (time reduction) to the effect control board 200 to transmit the game state command (time reduction) indicating the time reduction game state. Set to area. Then, when the game state command indicating the time-saving game state is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-12-15.

(Step S105-4-12-15)
At step S105-4-12-15, the main CPU 101 clears the normal game state game number counter of the main RAM 103 (sets the counter value to 0). Then, when the normal game state game number counter is cleared (the counter value is set to 0), the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

Note that the executed flag does not necessarily have to be provided. For example, in step S105-4-12-8, only when the updated counter value is "1000" (for example, in the above-described situation of "2000" times, deny step S105-4-12-8 Judgment) If the process proceeds to step S105-4-12-10, the executed flag is unnecessary. In this case, the normal game state game number counter may be configured not to be cleared in step S105-4-12-15.

(Step S105-4-12-16)
In step S105-4-12-16, the main CPU 101 updates the variable probability game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. FIG. Specifically, the probability variable gaming state game number counter is "+1". Then, when the probability variable gaming state game number counter is updated, the processing is shifted to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding winning game processing)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S105-5 of special symbol-related processing) showing the winning game processing performed in the main control board 100. As shown in FIG.

(Step S105-5-1)
In step S105-5-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a winning opening is in progress. That is, it is determined whether or not "0" indicating a winning opening is set in the winning state storage area of the main RAM 103 . It should be noted that when the big winning opening is opened in step S105-5-3, which will be described later, the value of the winning state storage area changes from "0" to "1". If it is during the winning opening, the process proceeds to step S105-5-2, and if it is not during the winning opening, the process proceeds to step S105-5-4.

(Step S105-5-2)
At step S105-5-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time corresponding to the winning opening set at step S105-4-11 of FIG. 20 (for example, "10 seconds") has elapsed. Then, if the time corresponding to the winning opening has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-5-3, and if the time corresponding to the winning opening has not elapsed, step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing. to process.

(Step S105-5-3)
In step S105-5-3, the main CPU 101 opens the big winning opening 24 by driving the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 24b. Also, in the time management counter of the main RAM 103, the open time of 29.5 seconds is set. As a result, the first round of the winning game is started. In this process, the value of the winning state storage area is changed from "0" to "1". Then, when the big winning opening 24 is opened, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-4)
At step S105-5-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big winning opening is open. It is determined whether or not "1" indicating that the big winning hole is open is set in the winning state storage area of the main RAM 103. - 特許庁Then, when the big winning opening is being opened, the process proceeds to step S105-5-5, and when the big winning opening is not being opened, the process proceeds to step S105-5-7.

(Step S105-5-5)
In step S105-5-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether 29.5 seconds have passed while the big winning hole 24 remains open without 10 balls being detected by the big winning hole detection SW 24a, or the main CPU 101 detects the big winning hole. It is determined whether or not 10 balls have been detected by the SW 24a, or whether any condition for closing the big winning opening has been established. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S105-5-6, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process. to migrate.

(Step S105-5-6)
In step S105-5-6, the main CPU 101 shifts to an inter-round interval that constitutes a period from when the big winning port 24 is closed to when it is next opened. In this process, the value of the winning state storage area is changed from "1" to "2". When the inter-round interval is entered, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-7)
In step S105-5-7, the main CPU 101 determines whether the interval between rounds is in progress. That is, it is determined whether or not "2" indicating the inter-round interval is set in the winning state storage area of the main RAM 103 . If it is during the interval between rounds, the process proceeds to step S105-5-8, and if it is not during the interval between rounds, the process proceeds to step S105-5-13.

(Step S105-5-8)
In step S105-5-8, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is time to end the final round. For example, in step S105-5-11, which will be described later, as a result of updating (incrementing or decrementing) the number of rounds, if the number of remaining rounds is "0", it is determined that the last round has ended. If it is the end of the final round, the process proceeds to step S105-5-9, and if it is not the end of the final round, the process proceeds to step S105-5-11.

(Step S105-5-9)
In step S105-5-9, the main CPU 101 shifts to an ending informing that the winning game has ended. In this process, the value of the winning state storage area is changed from "2" to "3". Also, the time corresponding to the ending of the winning game (for example, 10 seconds) is set in the time management counter of the main RAM 103 . Then, when the process is shifted to the ending, the process shifts to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-10)
In step S105-5-10, the main CPU 101 sets the ending command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the ending command for executing the effect corresponding to the ending of the winning game to the effect control board 200. When the ending command is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-11)
At step S105-5-11, the main CPU 101 updates the value of the round number counter in the main RAM 103. FIG. The update method may be increment or decrement. For example, when 5 rounds are awarded, the round number counter of the main RAM 103 may be set to "5" and decremented by 1 each time one round is completed. may be incremented by 1 each time one round is digested instead of setting "5" to . After updating the number of rounds, the process proceeds to step S105-5-12.

(Step S105-5-12)
At step S105-5-12, the main CPU 101 opens the big winning opening 24 by driving the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 24b. Also, in the time management counter of the main RAM 103, the open time of 29.5 seconds is set. As a result, the second and subsequent rounds of the winning game are started. In this process, the value of the winning state storage area is changed from "0" to "1". Then, when the big winning opening 24 is opened, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-13)
At step S105-5-13, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time (for example, 10 seconds) corresponding to the ending set at step S105-5-9 has passed. Then, if the time corresponding to the ending has passed, the process proceeds to step S105-5-14, and if the time corresponding to the ending has not passed, step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process. to process.

(Step S105-5-14)
In step S105-5-14, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol is one of "special symbol A", "special symbol B" and "special symbol E". That is, it is determined whether the special symbol determined based on the win is one of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E". Then, if the special symbol is one of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E", the process proceeds to step S105-5-15, and the special symbol is "special symbol A". , "special symbol B" and "special symbol E", the process proceeds to step S105-5-18.

(Step S105-5-15)
At step S105-5-15, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the variable probability gaming state. Therefore, in this process, "2" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. FIG. When "2" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S105-5-16.

(Step S105-5-16)
In step S105-5-16, the main CPU 101 transmits the game state command (variable probability) indicating the variable probability game state to the effect control board 200, and transmits the game state command (variable probability) to the command transmission area. set. Then, when the game state command indicating the variable probability game state is set, the process proceeds to step S105-5-17.

(Step S105-5-17)
At step S105-5-17, the main CPU 101 sets the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 to a value "0" indicating that the game is stopped. Then, in the special symbol state flag storage area, when the value "0" indicating that the game is stopped is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-18)
In step S105-5-18, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to the time-saving game state. Therefore, in this process, "1" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. FIG. When "1" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S105-5-19.

It should be noted that the transition to the time-saving gaming state in the process may be referred to as "opportunity 1" or "time-saving gaming state operated (shifted) by opportunity 1" below.

(Step S105-5-19)
In step S105-5-19, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103 to "100". As a result, the time saving game state of "100" times starts from the next variation. When "100" is set in the time-saving game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S105-5-20.

In addition, although "100" is set to the time-saving game state game number counter for both "opportunity 1" and "opportunity 2", it is not limited to this. "Trigger 1" may be set to a larger value than "Trigger 2", and "Trigger 1" may be set to a smaller value than "Trigger 2".

Further, both the "opportunity 1" and the "opportunity 2" may have a plurality of values to be set in the time-saving gaming state game number counter. Also, one of the "trigger 1" and "trigger 2" has a plurality of types, but the other may have only one type.

(Step S105-5-20)
In step S105-5-20, the main CPU 101 sets a command transmission area in order to transmit a gaming state command (time saving) indicating a time saving gaming state to the effect control board 200. FIG. Then, when the game state command (time saving) indicating the time saving game state is set, the process proceeds to step S105-5-21.

(Step S105-5-21)
At step S105-5-21, the main CPU 101 sets the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 to a value "0" indicating that the game is stopped. Then, in the special symbol state flag storage area, when the value "0" indicating that the game is stopped is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding abnormality determination processing)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S108 of the main control board timer interrupt process) showing the abnormality determination process performed in the main control board 100. FIG.

(Step S108-1)
In step S108-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether a magnetic sensor input has been made. Specifically, it is determined whether an input has been made from the magnetic sensor 27h. If an input is made from the magnetic sensor 27h, the process proceeds to step S108-2, and if an input is not made from the magnetic sensor 27h, the process proceeds to step S108-4.

(Step S108-2)
In step S108-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether the amount of magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor 27h exceeds a specified value. If the amount of magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor 27h exceeds the specified value, the process proceeds to step S108-3, and if the amount of magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor 27h does not exceed the specified value, , the process proceeds to step S108-4.

(Step S108-3)
In step S108-3, the main CPU 101 sets a magnetic anomaly designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the magnetic anomaly designation command for notifying the magnetic anomaly to the effect control board 200. FIG. Then, when the magnetic abnormality specifying command is set, the process proceeds to step S108-4.

(Step S108-4)
In step S108-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an electric wave sensor input has been made. Specifically, it is determined whether an input has been made from the radio wave sensor 27i. If an input is made from the radio wave sensor 27i, the process proceeds to step S108-5, and if no input is made from the radio wave sensor 27i, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S108-5)
In step S108-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether the amount of radio waves detected by the radio wave sensor 27i exceeds a specified value. If the amount of radio waves detected by the radio wave sensor 27i exceeds the specified value, the process proceeds to step S108-6. , the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S108-6)
In step S108-6, the main CPU 101 sets the radio wave abnormality designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the radio wave abnormality designation command for notifying the radio wave abnormality to the effect control board 200. FIG. Then, when the radio wave abnormality designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Regarding control processing performed by the sub CPU 201)
Control processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29. FIG. 24 to 29 are stored in the sub ROM 202, and the sub CPU 201 reads out the control program from the sub ROM 202 and performs control processing according to the read control program.

(Step S200)
In step S200, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage (power outage state). As a result, when the power is interrupted (power outage state), the process of step S200 is repeatedly executed, and when the power is not interrupted (power outage state), the process proceeds to step S201. It should be noted that during a power outage (power outage state), the process can be executed using a backup power supply (not shown).

(Step S201)
In step S201, the sub CPU 201 performs initial setting processing for initializing the values of internal registers and the like. After completing the initial setting process, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the sub CPU 201 sets CTC. That is, a CTC (counter timer circuit) that has a function to create a pulse output with a constant period and a function to measure time is set, and the effect control board timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed periodically every 4 ms. , set the time constant register of the CTC. After setting the CTC, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the sub CPU 201 prohibits the interruption of the effect control board timer interrupt process which is periodically executed by interrupting the effect control board main process. When the interrupt is prohibited, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the sub CPU 201 updates the random number for effect. Then, when the effect random number updating process ends, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the sub CPU 201 permits the interruption of the effect control board timer interrupt process which is periodically executed by interrupting the effect control board main process. Then, when the interrupt is permitted, the process moves to step S203 again, and thereafter steps S203 to S205 are looped.

(Regarding production control board timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the effect control board timer interruption process performed in the effect control board 200. As shown in FIG. This process is a process that is executed by interrupting the above-described effect control board main process periodically (for example, every 4 ms).

(Step S300)
In step S300, the sub CPU 201 saves the contents of the register to the stack area. After saving the contents of the register to the stack area, the process proceeds to step S301.

(Step S301)
In step S<b>301 , the sub CPU 201 performs processing for updating the timer managed by the effect control board 200 . After updating the timer, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 201 performs input processing of the operation device shown in FIG. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 26 . Then, when the operation device input processing is completed, the processing proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 201 performs main command reception processing shown in FIGS. This process will be detailed later with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. Then, when the main command reception process ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for transmitting a subcommand. A subcommand is a command that is set in the main command receiving process of FIGS. 27 and 28, which will be described later. In this process, the subcommand is sent to the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c. . Then, the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c that have received the subcommand control the effects of display, sound, light emission, and drive corresponding to the subcommand. Then, when the subcommand is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 201 restores the contents saved in the stack area in step S300 to the register. Then, when the contents saved in the stack area are returned to the register, the effect control board timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Regarding operation device input processing)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process) showing the operation device input process performed in the effect control board 200. As shown in FIG.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the cross key detection SW (up or down) input has been performed. The cross-key detection SW 16a shown in FIG. 4 has switches corresponding to the up, down, left, and right sides of the cross-key button 16. For example, if the top of the cross-key button 16 is operated, It can be determined that the input of the cross key detection SW (up) has been performed. Then, when the cross key detection SW (up or down) input is performed, the process proceeds to step S302-2, and when the cross key detection SW (up or down) input is not performed, step S302- 5 is processed.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 201 determines whether an upward cross key detection SW input has been made. If an upward cross key detection SW input is made, the process proceeds to step S302-3, and if an upward cross key detection SW input is not made, the process proceeds to step S302-4. Transition.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 201 transmits a light amount value change (increase) subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. to set. Thereby, the brightness of the image display device 26 and the light emitting device 9 can be increased. Then, when the light amount value change (increase) subcommand is set, the process proceeds to step S303 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-4)
In step S302-4, the sub CPU 201 transmits the light amount value change (decrease) subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. to set. Thereby, the brightness of the image display device 26 and the light emitting device 9 can be lowered. Then, when the light amount value change (decrease) subcommand is set, the process proceeds to step S303 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-5)
In step S302-5, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the cross key detection SW (left or right) input has been performed. Then, when the cross key detection SW (left or right) input is performed, the process proceeds to step S302-6, and when the cross key detection SW (left or right) input is not performed, step S302- The processing is shifted to 9.

(Step S302-6)
In step S302-6, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a right direction cross key detection SW input has been performed. If the right direction cross key detection SW input is performed, the process proceeds to step S302-7, and if the right direction cross key detection SW input is not performed, the process proceeds to step S302-8. Transition.

(Step S302-7)
In step S302-7, the sub CPU 201 sets a volume value change (increase) subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the volume value change (increase) subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b. As a result, the volume value of BGM (background music), sound effects, etc. output from the speaker 10 can be increased. Then, when the volume value change (increase) subcommand is set, the process proceeds to step S303 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-8)
In step S302-8, the sub CPU 201 sets the volume value change (decrease) subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the volume value change (decrease) subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b. As a result, the volume value of BGM, sound effects, etc. output from the speaker 10 can be lowered. Then, when the volume value change (decrease) subcommand is set, the process proceeds to step S303 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-9)
In step S302-9, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to other operating devices. For example, if there is an input from the production button detection SW 14a, a production button operation subcommand is sent to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c, and if there is an input from the production lever detection SW 15a, the production lever operation subcommand is sent. It is transmitted to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, when the processing corresponding to the other operating devices is completed, the processing is shifted to step S303 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding main command reception processing)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S301 of the effect control board timer interrupt process) showing the main command receiving process 1/2 performed in the effect control board 200. As shown in FIG.

(Step S301-1)
In step S301-1, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a power-related information command has been received. The power-related information command includes the above-described power-on command and power-recovery command. If any of these commands have been received, the process proceeds to step S301-2, and if none of these commands have been received, the process proceeds to step S301-4.

(Step S301-2)
In step S301-2, the sub CPU 201 performs a power-related information command reception process. For example, if a power-on command is received, processing related to power-on is performed, and if a power-restoration command is received, power-restoration processing is performed. Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-3.

(Step S301-3)
In step S301-3, the sub CPU 201 sets a power source related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the power source related subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-4)
In step S301-4, the sub CPU 201 determines whether an error-related information command has been received. The error-related information command includes the above-described magnetic anomaly designation command and radio anomaly designation command. If any of these commands have been received, the process proceeds to step S301-5, and if none of these commands have been received, the process proceeds to step S301-7.

(Step S301-5)
In step S301-5, the sub CPU 201 performs processing when an error-related information command is received. For example, if a magnetic anomaly designation command is received, a magnetic anomaly error process is performed, and if a radio anomaly designation command is received, a radio anomaly error process is performed. Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-6.

(Step S301-6)
In step S301-6, the sub CPU 201 sets an error-related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the error-related subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-7)
In step S301-7, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received a start port related information command. The starting opening related information command includes the above-described first starting opening winning command, second starting opening winning command, first starting opening subtraction command, second starting opening subtraction command, reserved storage area designation command. If any of these commands have been received, the process proceeds to step S301-8, and if none of these commands have been received, the process proceeds to step S301-11.

(Step S301-8)
In step S301-8, the sub CPU 201 performs icon change effect determination processing. Specifically, when receiving the first starting opening winning command or the second starting opening winning command, the sub CPU 201 refers to the information of the determination result of the winning determination process included in the command, and the variable icon and the display mode of the pending icon (the color of the variable icon and the pending icon described in the "holding prefetch effect" described later). Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-9.

(Step S301-9)
In step S301-9, the sub CPU 201 performs a starting opening light emitting device change effect determination process. The light emission color of the starting door light emitting device is linked to the color of the pending icon determined in step S301-8. If it is decided to use blue, the starting port light emitting device 21a also emits blue light. Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-10.

(Step S301-10)
In step S301-10, the sub CPU 201 sets the starting port related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the starting port related subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-11)
At step S301-11, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a gaming state related information command has been received. The game state related information command includes a game state command (normal), a game state command (time saving), and a game state command (variable probability). If any of these commands have been received, the process proceeds to step S301-12, and if none of these commands have been received, the process proceeds to step S301-14.

(Step S301-12)
At step S301-12, the sub CPU 201 performs a game state related information command reception process. For example, when the game state command (normal) is received, the normal game state is processed, and when the game state command (time saving) is received, the time saving game state is processed, and when the game state command (probability change) is received, the probability change game state Perform processing related to Then, when the process is finished, the process moves to step S301-13.

(Step S301-13)
In step S301-13, the sub CPU 201 sets the game state related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the game state related subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-14)
In step S301-14, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a gate passage command has been received. If the gate pass command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-15, and if the gate pass command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-16.

(Step S301-15)
In step S301-15, the sub CPU 201 sets the gate passage subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the gate passage subcommand to the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding main command reception processing)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S301 of the effect control board timer interrupt process) showing the main command receiving process 2/2 performed in the effect control board 200. As shown in FIG.

(Step S301-16)
At step S301-16, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received a design designation command. Then, when the design designation command is received, the process proceeds to step S301-17, and when the design designation command is not received, the process proceeds to step S301-19.

(Step S301-17)
At step S301-17, the sub CPU 201 performs a process when receiving a design designation command. For example, when a pattern specifying command designating the special pattern A is received, the combination of the decorative patterns '777' is determined so that the combination of the patterns '777' is definitely displayed as the decorative pattern. It should be noted that the combination of the decorative patterns "444" may be determined so that the combination of the decorative patterns "444" is displayed as the decorative pattern when the pattern designation command designating the special pattern A is received. good. In this case, after the winning game is completed, the game may be shifted to the time-saving game state so that the game state is apparently the time-saving game state, but the actual game state is the probability variable game state. By constructing in this way, it may be advantageous in terms of appearance even in the time-saving game state, so that the game interest can be improved. Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-18.

In addition, in step S301-17, when a symbol designation command designating a special symbol (hit) is received, referring to the executed flag of the sub RAM 203, if the executed flag is ON, the executed flag is changed. Turn off. Similarly, when a power-on command or a set value changing command (a command sent when the main RAM 103 is cleared) is received, the executed flag of the sub-RAM 203 is referred to, and the executed flag is turned ON. , the executed flag is turned OFF.

(Step S301-18)
In step S301-18, the sub CPU 201 sets the sub-symbol-related subcommand in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the sub-symbol-related subcommand to the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-19)
In step S301-19, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received a special symbol variation pattern designation command. Then, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is received, the process proceeds to step S301-20, and when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is not received, the process proceeds to step S301-25.

(Step S301-20)
At step S301-20, the sub CPU 201 performs a variation effect pattern determination process. Specifically, a variation performance pattern corresponding to the specified special symbol variation pattern is determined from a variation performance pattern determination table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 202 . In addition, one special symbol variation pattern is associated with one or a plurality of variation performance patterns in the variation performance pattern determination table. For example, if it is "normal fluctuation" (7S) of "variation pattern 1", one corresponding fluctuation effect pattern (7S) is prepared, and "super reach" (40S) of "variation pattern 3" For example, a plurality of corresponding variable effect patterns (40S) are prepared. Then, when "variation pattern 3" is received, any one variation performance pattern is determined from a plurality of prepared variation performance patterns. In addition, since a plurality of prepared variation performance patterns have different performance contents, a plurality of performances can be executed for one variation pattern. Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-21.

(Step S301-21)
In step S301-21, the sub CPU 201 performs icon change effect update processing. The icon change effect update process is to update the color of the icon determined in step S301-8 based on a change scenario (not shown). For example, if the change scenario is blue→yellow, it is determined to change to yellow in the process. In other words, the icon may change color each time a game with one variation is played. Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-22.

(Step S301-22)
In step S301-22, the sub CPU 201 performs a starting opening light emitting device change effect update process. This processing is performed in conjunction with the color updated in step S301-21. For example, if the color is updated to yellow in step S301-21, the starting port light emitting device 21a also changes from blue to yellow. change to Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-23.

(Step S301-23)
In step S301-23, the sub CPU 201 performs a big-hit announcement effect determination process. Specifically, a big hit notice effect to be executed in the symbol variation game is determined from a big win notice effect determination table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 202 . Here, the big hit announcement effect is an effect that can be executed in the symbol variation game, and one symbol variation game can execute one or a plurality of big win announcement effects. In addition, the big hit notice effect is difficult to be determined when it is determined to be a hit in the special symbol hit determination process, and is easily determined when it is determined to be lost (big hit notice effect A), or in the special symbol hit determination process. It is easy to decide when it is determined to be a hit, and it is difficult to decide when it is determined to be a loss (big hit announcement performance B), and it is possible to decide only when it is determined to be a win in the special pattern winning determination process. It is provided with the one that is not determined when it is determined to be a loss (big hit notice effect C, so-called premier notice). Also, in a winning symbol variation game, multiple announcements are likely to be made, and in a losing (especially normal variation, losing) symbol variation game, it is difficult to make multiple announcements. Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S301-24.

(Step S301-24)
In step S301-24, the sub CPU 201 transmits the variation pattern-related subcommand (for example, the information determined in steps S301-20 to S301-23) to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, set the variation pattern-related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-25)
At step S301-25, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not an executed command has been received. Then, if an executed command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-26, and if an executed command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-27.

(Step S301-26)
In step S301-26, the sub CPU 201 turns on the executed flag in the sub RAM 203. FIG. The executed flag in the sub-RAM 203 is referred to in specific effect determination processing (see FIG. 29), which will be described later. Then, when the executed flag is turned ON in the sub-RAM 203, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-27)
At step S301-27, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number-of-games counter command has been received. Then, when the number-of-games counter command is received, the process proceeds to step S301-28, and when the number-of-games counter command is not received, the process proceeds to step S301-30.

(Step S301-28)
In step S301-28, the sub CPU 201 performs specific effect determination processing shown in FIG. Note that this processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 29 . Then, when the specific effect determination process ends, the process proceeds to step S301-29.

(Step S301-29)
In step S301-29, the sub CPU 201 sets a specific effect-related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the specific effect-related subcommand to the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-30)
In step S301-30, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to other received commands. For example, when a setting value changing command, a setting value information command, a setting value checking command, and a setting value confirmation end command are received, processing corresponding to these received commands is performed. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding specific production decision processing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S301-28 of the main command receiving process) showing the specific effect determination process performed in the effect control board 200. As shown in FIG.

(Step S301-28-1)
In step S301-28-1, the sub CPU 201 refers to the executed flag of the sub RAM 203. FIG. Then, referring to the executed flag of the sub-RAM 203, the process proceeds to step S301-28-2.

(Step S301-28-2)
In step S301-28-2, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the executed flag is ON. Specifically, in step S301-28-1, as a result of referring to the executed flag of the sub-RAM 203, it is determined whether the executed flag is ON. If the executed flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S301-28-3, and if the executed flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S301-28-4.

(Step S301-28-3)
At step S301-28-3, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect table A and determines a specific effect. Note that the effect table A and the specific effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the effect table A is referred to and the specific effect is determined, the process proceeds to step S301-29.

(Step S301-28-4)
At step S301-28-4, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect table B and determines a specific effect. Note that the effect table B will also be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the effect table B is referred to and the specific effect is determined, the process proceeds to step S301-29.

(Regarding production table and specific production)
Next, the effect table and specific effect will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the effect table A and the effect table B shown in FIG. 30 are stored in the sub ROM 202 .

First, the specific effect is a production that suggests (informs) that there is a possibility of shifting (to the time-saving game state) for the time-saving game state (opportunity 2) that transitions in the game state-specific processing of FIG. 21 described above. That is. As described above, the opportunity 2 is, after the normal game state game number counter becomes "1000" and shifts to the time saving game state, the normal game state game number counter becomes "2000" without winning the winning game. However, it was decided that the transition to the time-saving game state would not be performed there.
A specific effect is an effect that suggests (informs) that Opportunity 2 has not yet occurred (the above-mentioned normal game state game number counter has not reached "1000"). is. Therefore, in the situation where the opportunity 2 has occurred (the above-mentioned normal game state game number counter exceeds "1000"), it is suggested that the opportunity 2 has already occurred because the specific effect is not performed. It is designed to (notify).
In addition, even if the opportunity 2 has already occurred (the above-mentioned normal game state game number counter exceeds "1000"), by executing some effect, the opportunity 2 has already occurred (the above-mentioned normal game state game number It may be suggested (notified) that the counter exceeds "1000".

As the specific effect, for example, a countdown effect shown in FIG. 30 can be cited. The countdown effect is, as shown in the effect table B, an effect that indicates (informs) the number of games played until the trigger 2 occurs. As for the countdown effect, "no effect" is selected regardless of whether the number-of-games counter is "700", "800" or "900" on the effect table A. The countdown effect itself is not executed. As shown in FIG. 29, since the effect table A is a table that is referred to when the executed flag is ON, the countdown effect will not be performed in the situation where the opportunity 2 has already occurred. . On the other hand, in the effect table B, when the number-of-games counter is "700", "300 remaining until ○○ RUSH!" If "200 remaining until ◯◯ RUSH!" is selected and the number-of-games counter is "900", "100 remaining until ◯◯ RUSH!" is selected as the effect content. Note that, as shown in FIG. 29, the effect table B is a table that is referred to when the executed flag is not ON, so the countdown effect is performed in a situation where the opportunity 2 does not occur. . In addition, "○○ RUSH" is the name of the presentation of the time-saving game state.

In this way, in a situation where the opportunity 2 has not occurred, the number of games played until the opportunity 2 occurs is suggested (notified) by a countdown effect, and in a situation where the opportunity 2 has already occurred, the countdown effect itself is not executed. made it As a result, the game is played without knowing whether the situation is that the opportunity 2 has not occurred or the situation that the opportunity 2 has already occurred, and the game is excessively played despite the fact that the opportunity 2 has already occurred. You can prevent it from being lost.

Note that the countdown effect is not limited to the contents of FIG. 30, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the countdown effect may be executed in each game (every one game), or the countdown effect may be executed in every “100” games. In the case of performing it in each game, the player can immediately grasp the occurrence situation of the opportunity 2, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being played excessively. In addition, when it is performed every "100" times of the game, it is possible to prevent the operation of the game from significantly declining.

Further, the specific effect is not limited to the countdown effect, and may be the number-of-games display effect shown in FIG. In the game number display effect, the game number image corresponding to the value of the game number counter is displayed on the image display device 26, and the trigger 2 is generated due to the difference in the display color, size, font, etc. of the game number image. It is an effect that suggests (announces) whether the situation is one in which the event has not occurred or the situation in which Trigger 2 has already occurred.
Specifically, in the effect table A referred to in the situation where the opportunity 2 has already occurred, the number-of-games image is displayed in a normal color (for example, yellow). On the other hand, in the effect table B referred to in the situation where the opportunity 2 has not occurred, the number-of-games image is displayed in red. As a result, it is possible for the player to grasp whether the situation is one in which the opportunity 2 has not occurred or the situation in which the opportunity 2 has already occurred. can be made).

It should be noted that the countdown effect and the number-of-plays display effect shown in FIG. 30 are executed when the opportunity 2 has not occurred and are not executed when the opportunity 2 has already occurred. In this case, it may be easy to execute (or may not be executed), but it may be difficult to execute (or may be executed) when the trigger 2 has already occurred.

Here, with reference to FIG. 68, specific display modes of the countdown effect and the number-of-games display effect will also be mentioned.

FIG. 68(a-1) shows a display mode when referring to the effect table A in the countdown effect, and FIG. 68(a-2) shows a display mode when referring to the effect table B in the countdown effect. showing.
"400" in the figure is the number-of-games image gc corresponding to the value of the number-of-games counter, and in the normal game state, the symbol variation game was continuously played "400" times without winning a winning game. It is shown that.

Then, in FIG. 68(a-2), in the "400th" symbol variation game, a countdown effect image cd such as "600 remaining until ○○ RUSH!" It can be grasped that it is "600" more times. On the other hand, in FIG. 68(a-1), in the "400th" symbol variation game, the countdown effect image cd such as "600 remaining until ○○ RUSH!" is not displayed. It can be grasped that the opportunity 2 has already occurred. A player who visually recognizes such a display mode can easily decide whether or not to continue playing the game, and can perform the game appropriately.

FIG. 68(b-1) shows a display mode when referring to the effect table A in the number-of-games display effect, and FIG. 68(b-2) shows a case of referring to the effect table B in the number-of-games display effect. is shown.
In the game number display effect, the display mode of the game number image gc changes depending on whether the opportunity 2 has occurred or not. When referring to the effect table A, as shown in FIG. , the display mode (display color, size, font, etc.) of the game number image gc in the "400th" symbol variation game is the same display mode (display color, size, font, etc. does not change). Become. On the other hand, when referring to the effect table B in which the opportunity 2 has not occurred, as shown in FIG. (display color, size, font, etc.) and the display mode (display color, size, font, etc.) of the game number image gc in the "400th" symbol variation game are different display modes (display color, size, etc.) , fonts, etc. change).

In this way, if the display mode of the game number image gc changes, it can be understood that the opportunity 2 has not occurred. It can be understood that the situation has already occurred. A player who visually recognizes such a display mode can easily decide whether or not to continue playing the game, and can perform the game appropriately.

When the number-of-games display effect is performed every game or every 100th game, the following may be assumed.
For example, in a situation where Opportunity 2 has not occurred, when the normal game state game number counter is "500" at the end of the first day of business at the amusement arcade, if the main RAM 103 is not initialized, 2 At the start of business on the day, the value of the above counter may be inherited. However, in this case, the number-of-games image gc displayed on the image display device 26 should start from "0".
Of course, when the main RAM 103 is initialized, the value of the counter becomes "0" and the number-of-games image gc displayed on the image display device 26 also becomes "0".
In other words, it is only necessary to make it impossible to detect whether the main RAM 103 is initialized or not from the number-of-games image gc.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the act of trying to play a game only at the start of business.
Further, if the main RAM 103 is not initialized, for example, when the symbol variation game is played consecutively "500" times without winning the winning game from the start of the business (the When the display is "500"), the transition to the time-saving game state by the opportunity 2 is performed, so that the player can be given an unexpectedness.
That is, only when the display of the number-of-games image gc becomes "1000", the shift to the time-saving gaming state by the opportunity 2 does not have to be performed.

Next, examples of various effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described below.

(Look-ahead effect)
The look-ahead effect is the timing at which the game ball enters the first start port 21 or the second start port 22, and prior to the special symbol hit determination process in the special symbol variation start time process (FIGS. 15 and 16 Winning time determination process) is performed, and it is an effect that is executed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination process. If the look-ahead effect is not installed, for example, when the game ball enters the first start port 21, after acquiring and storing the determination information (random number value), special symbol hit determination is performed in the special symbol variation start processing. Since the process is performed, even if the judgment information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area", it will not be judged whether it is a hit or not until the judgment information (random value) is moved to the "variable storage area" not. Therefore, even if you have acquired the judgment information (random value) of "hit", you will have a sense of anticipation of winning at the stage before the judgment information (random value) is transferred to the "variable storage area". It is not possible to execute a performance that enhances the performance. However, if a look-ahead effect is installed, for example, "pre-determination processing (determination processing at the time of winning a prize)" is performed, and after determining "hit" or "losing", determination information (random value ) is transferred (including the variation transferred to the relevant variation storage area), continuous production can be executed, so the determination information (random value) is transferred to the "variation storage area". You will be able to raise the expectation of "hit" from the previous stage.

A specific example of the look-ahead effect is a "suspended look-ahead effect". "Reservation look-ahead effect" mainly refers to the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 26o, the first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. It is an effect using the reserved icon to be displayed and the reserved icon displayed in the second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k to the second starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26n. For example, when the determination information (random value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", when the game ball enters the first start port 21, the determination information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area" numerical value) is stored, pre-determination processing is performed. Then, based on the determination result of the preliminary determination process, if it is determined to perform the pending look-ahead effect, the default normal color (white) pending icon ( Display a prefetch pending icon that is different from the normal icon). As the prefetch pending icon, for example, it is possible to display multiple types and stages such as “blue”, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow”, and the determination result of the preliminary determination process is “hit”. In the case of , one of "blue", "yellow", "green", "red", and "rainbow" can be displayed. Either "yellow", "green" or "red" can be displayed. Then, "Rainbow" can be selected only in the case of "winning", and in the case of "winning", it is easy to select "red", and in the case of "losing", select "blue". By making it easier, the expectations for the “red” hit are increased. Note that the relationship of the degree of expectation for a win is rainbow>red>green>yellow>blue>normal in descending order of the degree of expectation for a win. In the following, such an effect may be referred to as "holding change effect".

Further, as a specific example of another effect of the look-ahead effect, there is a "flash effect at the time of winning". The "flash effect at the time of winning" means that when a game ball enters the starting hole, the speaker lamp 10a provided in the lower speaker 10 emits light, and the symbol variation game related to the entering ball starts, or By continuing to emit light until the execution of the symbol variation game related to the entering ball or until the end of the symbol variation game related to the entering ball, it is an effect that raises the expectation for winning. For example, when the determination information (random value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", when the game ball enters the first start port 21, the determination information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area" numerical value) is stored, pre-determination processing is performed. Then, if it is determined that the flash effect at the time of winning is performed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination process, a scenario for emitting light from the speaker lamp 10a (scenario in which the emission color is determined) is selected, and the selected scenario is selected. , the speaker lamp 10a is caused to emit light.
The color of light emitted from the speaker lamp 10a is, for example, red>green>blue in descending order of the degree of expectation for winning. It is also possible to change to a higher color. Also, it is possible to output a winning sound corresponding to each color.

Further, as a specific example of another effect of the look-ahead effect, there is a "zone effect". A “zone effect” is a effect mainly using the image display device 26 . For example, when the determination information (random value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", when the game ball enters the first start port 21, the determination information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area" numerical value) is stored, pre-determination processing is performed. Then, when it is determined that the zone effect is to be performed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination process, for example, in the next symbol variation game, the image display device 26 displays "When all the special symbols are aligned, enter the ○○ zone!" And so on, after performing an effect to incite the rush, align the special symbols and rush into the "○○ zone", and the determination information (random value) stored in the above-mentioned "fourth storage area" ” until the change is moved to “○○ zone” effect. During execution of this "XX zone" presentation, the image display device 26 displays a telop such as "In the XX zone". The "zone effect" is more likely to be executed when it is determined to be "win" in the preliminary determination process, and is less likely to be executed when it is determined to be "losing". A great expectation can be given to the game being given.

Further, as a specific example of another effect of the look-ahead effect, there is a "chance continuous notice". The “chance eye continuous notice” is an effect using the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, and the right decorative design image 26c mainly displayed on the image display device 26. FIG. For example, when the determination information (random value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", when the game ball enters the first start port 21, the determination information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area" numerical value) is stored, pre-determination processing is performed. Then, when it is determined that the chance consecutive effect is performed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination process, for example, the symbol variation game corresponding to the determination information (random value) stored in the "first storage area" is executed. Confirmation display, symbol variation game confirmation display corresponding to the determination information (random value) stored in the "second storage area", and determination information (random value) stored in the "third storage area" The combination of the decorative pattern images of the same color is stopped in the confirmation display of the pattern variation game and the. For example, in the decorative pattern image, '333' and '777' are red, '111' and '555' are green, and '222' and '444' are red. , "666" and "888" are composed of blue, combinations of only red such as "337" and "773", combinations of only green such as "115" and "551", and combinations of "246" and "246". ” and “628”, which are blue-only combinations, are displayed for multiple variations, creating an effect that arouses expectations that a win will be awarded in the subsequent symbol variation game. In addition, in the case of winning, it is easy to select a combination with only red, and in the case of losing, it is easy to select a combination with only blue. is increasing.

(Pseudo consecutive notice)
The pseudo-continuous notice is an effect using the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the pseudo-continuous dedicated symbols that are mainly displayed on the image display device 26. In the "game", by repeating the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern, it is an effect that makes it appear as if the variation is being performed multiple times. For example, as shown in FIG. 8, pseudo-runs can be executed 2, 3, or 4 times, and the higher the number of times, the higher the expectation of winning (in this embodiment, 4 times). hit confirmed). As a specific effect content, for example, "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative design image 26a, "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative design image 26c, and "Pseudo" is displayed as the middle decorative design image 26b. "Next exclusive symbol (for example, "NEXT")" is temporarily stopped, and again all the decorative symbol images are variably displayed (at this point, pseudo-continuous two times), and "5" is again displayed as the left decorative symbol image 26a. ' is temporarily stopped, '6' is temporarily stopped displayed as the right decorative design image 26c, and 'pseudo-consecutive exclusive design (for example, 'NEXT')' is temporarily stopped displayed as the middle decorative design image 26b, Again, all the decorative pattern images are variably displayed (at this point, 3 times of the pseudo-continuity. Thereafter, the same applies to 4 times of the pseudo-continuation). When "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative design image 26a and "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative design image 26c, the pseudo-continuation is performed twice, and in the second temporary stop display, the left decorative design image is displayed. When "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed as 26a and "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol image 26c, the pseudo run is 3 times (the same applies to 4 pseudo runs hereinafter). In addition, after reaching the ready-to-win state, a so-called "pseudo-run after reach", in which a "pseudo-run dedicated symbol (for example, "NEXT")" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative symbol image 26b, or, for example, the first temporary run is displayed. At the start of the fluctuation after the stop display, a notice (symbol stop notice) that a "pseudo-consecutive exclusive pattern (for example, "NEXT")" will be temporarily stopped is displayed in the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and at that point, the pseudo It is also possible to execute an effect such that three times or more in a row is confirmed.

(Regarding the relationship between the winning sound for each icon, the changing sound, and the starting light emitting device (color))
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning sound, the changing sound, and the starting light emitting device (color) for each icon. In the figure, the determination time corresponds to the above-described "icon change effect determination processing", and the update time corresponds to the above-described "icon change effect update process". Note that the winning sound and the changing sound are common when the ball enters the first starting hole 21 and when the ball enters the second starting hole 22 .

When the default "normal icon" is displayed, the speaker 10 outputs the sound "Piron♪" as the prize winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
Note that in the change scenario, for example, the blue icon will not change to the normal icon, so the column at the time of update is "-".
Further, when the "normal icon" is displayed, the light emission color of the starting port light emitting device 21a is white.

When the "blue icon" is displayed, the speaker 10 outputs a sound "Poron♪" as a prize-winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
When the icon changes from the normal icon to the blue icon, the speaker 10 outputs a sound "Poron♪" as a change sound at the time of updating.
Further, when displaying the "blue icon", the emission color of the starting port light emitting device 21a is blue.

When the "yellow icon" is displayed, the speaker 10 outputs a sound "Keep♪" as a prize-winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
Also, when the normal icon changes to a yellow icon or when the blue icon changes to a yellow icon, a sound "Keep♪" is output from the speaker 10 as a change sound at the time of updating.
Moreover, when displaying a "yellow icon", the luminescent color of the starting port light-emitting device 21a is yellow.

When the "green icon" is displayed, the speaker 10 outputs a sound "bang♪" as a prize-winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
Also, when the normal icon changes to a green icon, when the blue icon changes to a green icon, or when the yellow icon changes to a green icon, a sound of "Chang♪" is played on the speaker as the change sound at the time of updating. Output from 10.
Further, when displaying the "green icon", the light emission color of the starting port light emitting device 21a is green.

When the "red icon" is displayed, the speaker 10 outputs the sound "Jackin'" as the prize winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
Also, if the normal icon changes to a red icon, if a blue icon changes to a red icon, if a yellow icon changes to a red icon, or if a green icon changes to a red icon, the changes at the time of update As a sound, the sound "Jackin♪" is output from the speaker 10. - 特許庁
Moreover, when displaying a "red icon", the luminescent color of the starting port light-emitting device 21a is red.

When the "rainbow icon" is displayed, the speaker 10 outputs a sound "Quinn♪" as a prize winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
Also, when the normal icon changes to the rainbow icon, when the blue icon changes to the rainbow icon, when the yellow icon changes to the rainbow icon, when the green icon changes to the rainbow icon, When the icon changes from a red icon to a rainbow icon, the speaker 10 outputs a sound "Quinn♪" as a changing sound at the time of updating.
Further, when the "rainbow icon" is displayed, the light emission color of the starting port light emitting device 21a is rainbow.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the icons (the variable icon and the pending icon) are not displayed during execution of the super reach because the effect of the super reach is executed using substantially the entire display area.
In this way, even if the icon is hidden during execution of super reach (for example, if the red icon is displayed, even if it is hidden), the starting door light emitting device 21a corresponds to the hidden icon. Since the light is visibly emitted in the color (red) to be displayed, it is possible to recognize from the starting port light emitting device 21a to what color the icon has changed.

Also, since the winning sound and changing sound corresponding to each icon are determined, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the icon has changed (what color it has changed to, etc.).

(Regarding control processing performed by the image/sound CPU 204)
Next, control processing performed by the image/sound CPU 204 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35. FIG. 32 to 34 show the image/sound control unit main processing performed by the image/sound CPU 204, and FIG.・This is the timer interrupt processing of the sound control unit.

(Step S400-1)
In step S400-1, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether or not a volume value/light value related subcommand has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not a volume value/light value related subcommand has been received from the effect control unit 200a. Various subcommands are received by the image/sound control section timer interrupt processing in FIG. Then, when the volume value/light value related subcommand is received, the process proceeds to step S400-2, and when the volume value/light value related subcommand is not received, the process proceeds to step S400-3. do.

(Step S400-2)
In step S400-2, the image/sound CPU 204 performs the volume value/light value related subcommand reception processing shown in FIG. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 33 . When the volume value/light intensity value related subcommand receiving process is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-3.

(Step S400-3)
In step S400-3, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether or not a power-related subcommand has been received. Then, if a power-related subcommand has been received, the process proceeds to step S400-4, and if a power-related subcommand has not been received, the process proceeds to step S400-5.

(Step S400-4)
In step S400-4, when the image/sound CPU 204 receives the power-related subcommand related to the power-on command, it performs image/sound setting processing related to power-on, and receives the power-related subcommand related to the power restoration command. If so, image/sound setting processing related to power restoration is performed. It should be noted that an example of the display and sound notification mode executed by performing the image/sound setting process related to power restoration will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 40 and the like. When the image/sound setting process at power-on or power-recovery is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-5.

(Step S400-5)
In step S400-5, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether or not a game state-related subcommand has been received. Then, when the game state related subcommand is received, the process proceeds to step S400-6, and when the game state related subcommand is not received, the process proceeds to step S400-8.

(Step S400-6)
In step S400-6, the image/sound CPU 204 updates, for example, a predetermined area (game state management area) of the RAM (not shown) to a game state corresponding to the received game state-related subcommand. Specifically, if the received gaming state related subcommand indicates the normal gaming state, the value of the predetermined area of the RAM is set to "0", and the received gaming state related subcommand indicates the time saving gaming state. If there is, the value of the predetermined area of the RAM is set to "1", and if the received gaming state related subcommand indicates the variable probability gaming state, the value of the predetermined area of the RAM is set to "2". Then, when the gaming state is updated, the process proceeds to step S400-7.

(Step S400-7)
In step S400-7, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to the updated gaming state. For example, when the normal game state is updated in step S400-6, display and sound (BGM, etc.) corresponding to the normal game state are output by the processing in step S400-7. Then, when the image/sound setting process corresponding to the updated gaming state is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-8.

(Step S400-8)
In step S400-8, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether or not a start port-related subcommand has been received. Then, when the start port related subcommand is received, the process proceeds to step S400-9, and when the start port related subcommand is not received, the process proceeds to step S400-10.

(Step S400-9)
In step S400-9, the image/sound CPU 204 performs the start port-related subcommand reception processing shown in FIG. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34 . Then, when the start port-related subcommand reception process is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-10.

(Step S400-10)
In step S400-10, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether or not a gate passage subcommand has been received. If the gate passage subcommand has been received, the process proceeds to step S400-11, and if the gate passage subcommand has not been received, the process proceeds to step S400-13.

(Step S400-11)
In step S400-11, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether the game state is the normal game state. Specifically, the value in the predetermined area of the RAM described in step S400-6 is referenced to determine whether the value is "0". If the value is "0", the process proceeds to step S400-12, and if the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S400-13.

(Step S400-12)
In step S400-12, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to left-handed hitting. In other words, it determines that the game is being played right-handed even though it is in the normal game state, and performs a setting process for performing notification to prompt the player to play left-handed. An example of the display and sound notification mode executed by performing the image/sound setting process corresponding to left-handed hitting will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 39 and the like. Then, when the image/sound setting process corresponding to left-handed hitting is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-13.

(Step S400-13)
In step S400-13, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether an error-related subcommand has been received. Then, if an error-related subcommand has been received, the process proceeds to step S400-14, and if an error-related subcommand has not been received, the process proceeds to step S400-15.

(Step S400-14)
In step S400-14, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to the content of the error. An example of the display and sound notification mode executed by performing the image/sound setting process corresponding to the error content will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 51 and the like. After completing the image/sound setting process corresponding to the error content, the process proceeds to step S400-15.

(Step S400-15)
In step S400-15, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to other subcommands. When image/sound setting processing corresponding to other subcommands is finished, the processing proceeds to step S400-16.

(Step S400-16)
In step S400-16, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether the frame switching flag is ON in a flag management area (not shown) provided in the image/sound control unit 200b. The frame switching flag is turned ON every 33 ms because it is turned ON by the image/sound control unit timer interrupt processing in FIG. That is, in the image display device 26, one frame of image is displayed every 33 ms. A dedicated RAM may be provided as a management area for managing the frame switching flag, or the VRAM 207 may be used. If the frame switching flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S400-17, and if the frame switching flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S400-1.

(Step S400-17)
In step S400-17, the image/sound CPU 204 turns off the frame switching flag. Then, when the frame switching flag is turned OFF, the process proceeds to step S400-18.

(Step S400-18)
In step S400-18, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image generation processing. Specifically, image information per frame is generated based on the contents set in each image/sound setting process. As a result, an image in one frame is generated. The concept of image generation will be touched on later in FIG. When the image generation process is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-19.

(Step S400-19)
In step S400-19, the image/sound CPU 204 performs sound generation processing. Specifically, sound information for one frame is generated based on the contents set in each image/sound setting process. As a result, sound is generated in one frame. Then, when the sound generation process ends, the process proceeds to step S400-20.

(Step S400-20)
In step S400-20, the image/sound CPU 204 performs processing for outputting the generated image and sound in one frame. As a result, the generated image in one frame is displayed on the image display device 26 and the generated sound in one frame is output from the speaker 10 . When the output process is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-1.

(Regarding processing when receiving subcommands related to volume and light intensity values)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S400-2 of the main processing of the image/sound control section) showing the processing performed by the image/sound CPU 204 upon receipt of the volume value/light amount value related subcommand.

(Step S400-2-1)
In step S400-2-1, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether the level gauge image is being displayed. As described above, the level gauge image is an image that indicates the degree of adjustment of the amount of light and sound volume, and will be described later in FIG. 42 and the like. If the level gauge image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S400-2-2, and if the level gauge image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S400-2-4.

The level gauge image indicating the degree of adjustment of the light amount and the level gauge image indicating the degree of adjustment of the sound volume are started to be displayed by performing the processing of step S400-2-4, which will be described later. After that, the display is continued for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) even if the operation for adjusting the amount of light or the sound volume is not performed. On the other hand, when the light amount or sound volume is adjusted, the process of step S400-2-3 described later is performed, thereby switching to a level gauge image corresponding to the degree of adjustment (see FIG. 42).

(Step S400-2-2)
In step S400-2-2, the image/sound CPU 204 performs update processing according to the content of the received volume value/light value related subcommand. For example, when a light intensity value change (increase) subcommand is received, the light intensity value is increased by one step, and when a light intensity value change (decrease) subcommand is received, the light intensity value is decreased by one step, and the updated value is stored in a predetermined area (an area for managing the volume value and the light intensity value) of the RAM (not shown). Also, when the volume value change (increase) subcommand is received, the volume value is increased by one step, and when the volume value change (decrease) subcommand is received, the volume value is decreased by one step, and the updated value is stored in a predetermined area (an area for managing the volume value and the light intensity value) of the RAM (not shown). Then, when the update process ends, the process moves to step S400-2-3.

(Step S400-2-3)
In step S400-2-3, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to the updated values. For example, if the current volume value is 3 and a volume value change (decrease) subcommand is received, a level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2 and an adjustment sound corresponding to volume value 2 are set (see FIG. 42). ). When the image/sound setting process corresponding to the updated values is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-3 of the image/sound control unit main process.

(Step S400-2-4)
In step S400-2-4, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to the current values. For example, if the current volume value is 3, a level gauge image corresponding to volume value 3 and an adjustment sound corresponding to volume value 3 are set. When the image/sound setting process corresponding to the updated values is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-3 of the image/sound control unit main process.

In the processing of FIG. 33 above, even if the volume value/light value related subcommand is received, if the level gauge image is not displayed, first, in the processing of step S400-2-4, the current value is set to Display the corresponding level gauge image (for example, corresponds to the first operation).
On the other hand, if the level gauge image is displayed, the value is updated in step S400-2-2, and the level gauge image corresponding to the updated value is displayed in step S400-2-3 (for example, from the first operation corresponds to the second successive operation).
That is, the level gauge image corresponding to the current value is displayed by the first operation, and the value (light amount value, sound volume value) can be changed by the second successive operation.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the light quantity value and the sound volume value from being changed unintentionally by accidentally touching the cross key button 16 during the game.
Of course, the light amount value and the sound volume value may be changed in the initial operation.

(Regarding the processing when receiving start gate-related subcommands)
FIG. 34 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S400-9 of the main processing of the image/sound control unit) showing the processing performed by the image/sound CPU 204 upon reception of the start port-related subcommand.

(Step S400-9-1)
In step S400-9-1, the image/sound CPU 204 performs processing for updating a pending number counter (not shown) provided in the image/sound control unit 200b. In other words, the image/sound control unit 200b can also recognize the storage status of the determination information storage area (reserved storage area) of the main RAM 103 by the start opening-related subcommands transmitted from the effect control unit 200a. That is, even in the pending number counter provided in the image/sound control unit 200b, "0" is stored only in the change storage area, "1" is stored up to the first storage area, and "1" is stored up to the second storage area. It is possible to recognize "2" that is stored up to the third storage area, "3" that is stored up to the third storage area, and "4" that is stored up to the fourth storage area. A dedicated RAM may be provided for the pending number counter, or the VRAM 207 may be used. Then, when the pending number counter is updated, the process proceeds to step S400-9-2.

(Step S400-9-2)
In step S400-9-2, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound (winning sound) setting processing corresponding to the updated pending number counter value. For example, when the pending number counter value of the first starting port 21 is 3 and the starting port-related subcommand (no pending prefetch effect) related to the first starting port winning command is received, in the processing described in FIG. Set so that the normal icon is displayed, and set so that the winning sound "Piron♪" is output. When the image/sound setting process corresponding to the updated pending number counter value is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-9-3.

(Step S400-9-3)
In step S400-9-3, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether the game state is not the normal game state and whether or not the starting port-related subcommand related to the first starting port winning command has been received. Specifically, the image/sound CPU 204 refers to the predetermined area (game state management area) of the RAM (not shown) described in step S400-6, and determines whether a value other than "0" is stored. . Then, when a value other than "0" is stored, it is further determined whether or not a starting port-related subcommand related to the first starting port winning command has been received. If both conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S400-9-4, and if neither condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S400-10 of the image/sound control unit main process.

(Step S400-9-4)
In step S400-9-4, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to right-handed hitting. That is, despite the time-saving gaming state and variable probability gaming state, it is determined that left-handed hitting is being performed, and setting processing for performing notification to prompt left-handed hitting is performed. An example of the display and sound notification mode executed by performing the image/sound setting process corresponding to right-handed hitting will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. Then, when the image/sound setting process corresponding to right-handed hitting is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-10 of the image/sound control unit main process.

(Regarding image/sound control unit timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing image/sound control section timer interrupt processing performed in the image/sound CPU 204 . This processing is executed by interrupting the above-described image/sound control unit main processing periodically (for example, every 33 ms).

(Step S500)
In step S500, the image/sound CPU 204 performs processing for receiving various subcommands. That is, a process of receiving various subcommands from the effect control section 200a is performed. When various subcommands are received, the process proceeds to step S501.

(Step S501)
In step S501, the image/sound CPU 204 performs processing for updating the frame counter and the like. After updating the frame counter and the like, the process proceeds to step S502.

(Step S502)
In step S502, the image/sound CPU 204 turns on the frame switching flag. Then, when the frame switching flag is turned ON, the image/sound control unit timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Regarding control processing performed by the light emission driving CPU 208)
Next, control processing performed by the light emission drive CPU 208 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. FIG. 36 shows the light emission drive control unit main processing performed by the light emission drive CPU 208, and FIG. processing.

(Step S600-1)
In step S600-1, light emission driving CPU 208 determines whether various subcommands have been received. That is, it is determined whether any subcommand is received from the effect control section 200a. Various subcommands are received by the timer interrupt processing of the light emission drive control section in FIG. If various subcommands have been received, the process proceeds to step S600-2, and if various subcommands have not been received, the process proceeds to step S600-5.

(Step S600-2)
In step S600-2, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs light emission/drive setting processing. Specifically, the setting of the light emission pattern of the light emitting device 9 and the like and the setting of the driving pattern of the movable body 28 corresponding to the received subcommand are performed. When the light emission pattern of the light emitting device 9 or the like corresponding to the subcommand is set, light emission is controlled by the light emission pattern set in step S600-7 described later. , is driven and controlled according to the driving pattern set in step S600-8, which will be described later. When the light emission/driving setting process is completed, the process proceeds to step S600-3.

(Step S600-3)
In step S600-3, light emission drive CPU 208 determines whether or not a start port-related subcommand has been received. Then, when the start port related subcommand is received, the process proceeds to step S600-4, and when the start port related subcommand is not received, the process proceeds to step S600-5.

(Step S600-4)
In step S600-4, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs a process of updating a pending number counter (not shown) provided in the light emission drive control unit 200c. That is, even in the light emission drive control section 200c, it is possible to recognize the storage status of the determination information storage area (reserved storage area) of the main RAM 103 based on the start opening-related subcommands transmitted from the effect control section 200a. That is, even in the pending number counter provided in the light emission drive control unit 200c, "0" is stored only in the variation storage area, "1" is stored up to the first storage area, and "1" is stored up to the second storage area. It is possible to recognize "2" that is stored up to the third storage area, "3" that is stored up to the third storage area, and "4" that is stored up to the fourth storage area. A dedicated RAM may be provided for the pending number counter, or the light emission driving RAM 210 may be used. After updating the pending number counter, the process proceeds to step S600-5.

(Step S600-5)
In step S600-5, the light emission drive CPU 208 determines whether the frame switching flag is ON in a flag management area (not shown) provided in the light emission drive control unit 200c. The frame switching flag is turned ON every 33 ms because it is turned ON by the timer interrupt processing of the light emission drive control unit in FIG. As a result, for example, the display of the sub-hold display is updated every 33 ms. A dedicated RAM may be provided as a management area for managing the frame switching flag, or the light emission driving RAM 210 may be used. If the frame switching flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S600-6, and if the frame switching flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S600-1.

(Step S600-6)
In step S600-6, the light emission driving CPU 208 turns off the frame switching flag. Then, when the frame switching flag is turned OFF, the process proceeds to step S600-7.

(Step S600-7)
In step S600-7, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs light emission control processing. Specifically, the light emitting device 9 or the like is caused to emit light based on the light emission pattern set in step S600-2. When the light emission control process ends, the process proceeds to step S600-8.

(Step S600-8)
In step S600-8, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs drive control processing. Specifically, when the drive pattern of the movable body 28 is set in step S600-2, the drive control of the movable body 28 is performed. When the drive control process ends, the process proceeds to step S600-1.

(Regarding light emission drive control unit timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing a light emission drive controller timer interrupt process performed by the light emission drive CPU 208. As shown in FIG. This processing is executed by interrupting the above-described light emission drive control unit main processing periodically (for example, every 33 ms).

(Step S700)
In step S700, the light emission driving CPU 208 performs processing for receiving various subcommands. That is, a process of receiving various subcommands from the effect control section 200a is performed. When various subcommands are received, the process proceeds to step S701.

(Step S701)
In step S701, the light emission driving CPU 208 performs processing for updating the frame counter and the like. After updating the frame counter and the like, the process proceeds to step S702.

(Step S702)
In step S702, the light emission driving CPU 208 turns on the frame switching flag. Then, when the frame switching flag is turned ON, the light emission drive control unit timer interrupt processing ends.

FIG. 38 is a conceptual diagram that supplements the image generation processing in step S400-18 of FIG.
In image generation processing, a plurality of layers are synthesized to generate one display frame.
Note that the layers shown in FIG. 38 are merely examples, and the number of layers, display contents, and the like are not limited to these.

Layer 1 is a layer in the foreground of the screen, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information about power supply and information about errors.
The information about the power source and the information about the error are displayed, for example, by displaying the entire display area in black, and then displaying in white characters such as "Restoring screen display" or "Radio wave error" in white characters.
Therefore, since the entire display area is displayed in black, when power supply information or error information is displayed in the relevant layer, the layers (Layers 2 to 7) located at the back of the screen than the relevant layer are displayed. The content is invisible (even if there is some indication on each layer).
On the other hand, when the information about the power supply and the information about the error are not displayed on the layer, the display contents of the layers (layers 2 to 7) located behind the layer on the screen can be visually recognized.
Note that in the image generation process, for example, layers 1 to 7 are combined to generate one display frame regardless of whether or not information about power or information about errors is displayed on layer 1 .
For example, the VRAM 207 is provided with drawing areas (drawing area 1 to drawing area 7) corresponding to layers 1 to 7, respectively. 7 is stored. Then, the stored layers 1 to 7 are synthesized to generate one display frame.

The error information displayed in layer 1 corresponds to serious errors, such as magnetic errors detected by the magnetic sensor 27h and radio wave errors detected by the radio wave sensor 27i.
On the other hand, among errors, minor errors are displayed, for example, in a layer located further back in the screen than layer 1, and even if information about a minor error is displayed, a layer located further back in the screen than that layer is displayed. The display contents of are visible. In other words, it allows information about minor errors and other information to be displayed at the same time.
A minor error is, for example, a "ball removal error (report to remove a ball)" reported when a game ball is parked in the lower tray 5b and the game ball is not ejected from the lower tray 5b. ” and the like.
In this way, the display contents of other layers are made invisible for severe errors, and the display contents of other layers are made visible for minor errors, so that the administrator can quickly grasp the severity of the error. be able to.

Layer 2 is a layer positioned further in the screen than layer 1, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information related to suspension.
As shown in FIG. 38, the information about the hold includes the number hold displayed in the first start opening hold number image 26e and the second start opening hold number image 26f, the change icon displayed in the change icon display area 26o, and the change icon displayed in the change icon display area 26o. , 1st starting opening 1st reserved ball image display area 26g to 1st starting opening 4th reserved ball image display area 26j, 2nd starting opening 1st reserved ball image display area 26k to 2nd starting opening 4th reserved ball image display An example is the pending icon displayed in area 26n.
Note that even if the information about the hold is displayed (drawn) on the layer 2, the display contents of the layers (layers 3 to 7) positioned further on the screen than the layer concerned can be visually recognized.

It should be noted that when the status is "waiting for customers" as described above, the variable icon and the pending icon are not displayed (drawn) on Layer 2. FIG.
On the other hand, even if it is "waiting for customers", information "0" is displayed (drawn) on the layer 2 for the number pending displayed in the first starting gate reserved number image 26e and the second starting gate reserved number image 26f. It has become so. Thereby, it can be grasped that the executable symbol variation game is "0".

Further, when the above-described “demonstration is in progress”, none of the variable icon, the pending icon, and the number pending are displayed (drawn) on the layer 2. FIG. As a result, attention can be paid to the display of the model name and manufacturer name displayed during the demonstration presentation.
It should be noted that "Demonstrating" may be displayed in the same manner as "Waiting for customers".

Layer 3 is a layer located at the back of the screen relative to layer 2, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information regarding effect settings.
As shown in FIG. 38, the information related to effect settings includes a speaker icon image 26p indicating a speaker icon, a level gauge image indicating the degree of volume adjustment (in the example of FIG. 38, volume value level 3 is shown), , a lamp icon image indicating a lamp icon, and a level gauge image indicating the degree of adjustment of the amount of light (both not shown).
It should be noted that layer 3 is synthesized with other layers without being displayed when the sound volume and the amount of light are not adjusted.
In addition, even if information about effect settings is displayed (drawn) on layer 3, the display contents of the layers (layers 4 to 7) positioned behind the layer on the screen can be visually recognized.

Layer 4 is a layer positioned at the back of the screen relative to Layer 3, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information regarding the notice effect (the above-described big hit notice effect).
As shown in FIG. 38, the information about the notice effect includes, for example, a lightning image 26q imitating lightning (announcement that appears when developing to Super Reach) and images corresponding to other notice effects.
It should be noted that layer 4 is combined with other layers without displaying anything when the advance notice effect is not performed.
In addition, even if the information about the advance notice effect is displayed (drawn) on the layer 4, the display contents of the layers (layers 5 to 7) located behind the layer (layer 5 to layer 7) can be visually recognized.

A layer 5 is a layer located at the back of the screen relative to the layer 4, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information about a design.
As shown in FIG. 38, the information about the design includes a left decorative design image 26a, a middle decorative design image 26b, a right decorative design image 26c, and a fourth design image 26d.
Note that even if the information about the pattern is displayed (drawn) on Layer 5, the display contents of the layers (Layers 6 to 7) positioned behind the layer on the screen can be visually recognized.

A layer 6 is a layer located at the back of the screen relative to the layer 5, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information about the state.
The information about the state includes, as shown in FIG. 38, a left-handed hitting image 26r that prompts left-handed hitting and a right-handed hitting image 26s that prompts right-handed hitting.
The scene where the right shot image 26s is displayed is during the time saving game state and during the variable probability game state.
The scene in which the left-handed hitting image 26r is displayed is when the time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state, or when the right-handed hit is performed in the normal game state and the game ball is passed through the gate member 20.例文帳に追加
In addition, layer 6 is combined with other layers without being displayed when left-handed hitting is performed in the normal game state.
In addition, even if information about the state is displayed (drawn) on Layer 6, the display contents of a layer (Layer 7) positioned further on the screen than the layer concerned can be visually recognized.

Layer 7 is a layer located at the back of the screen relative to layer 6, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information about the background.
The information about the background, as shown in FIG. 38, for example, a background image showing a normal game state, a background image showing a time-saving game state (not shown), a background image showing a probability variable game state (not shown), and a winning state (not shown) A background image showing
In the image generation process, the display screen shown in FIG. 39 and subsequent figures is displayed as one frame by synthesizing the layers 1 to 7 described above.

(Diagram for explaining the first example of the notification mode)
Next, a first example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 39 assumes a case where the game ball passes through the gate member 20 during execution of the symbol variation game in the normal game state (that is, when the game ball is hit to the right in the normal game state).
Specifically, when the image/sound CPU 204 receives the gate passage subcommand at timing T1, it draws left-handed information (left-handed image 26r) on layer 6. FIG. Also, the speaker 10 outputs a sound prompting the player to hit left.
As a result, the speaker 10 outputs a voice saying "Please hit left", and the image display device 26 displays left-handed information (left-handed hitting image 26r).
Note that in FIG. 39, both before timing T1 and after timing T1, Layers 1 to 7 are always synthesized and displayed.
In this way, when a player hits to the right in the normal game state, a notification prompting him to hit to the left is provided.

(Diagram for explaining a second example of the notification mode)
Next, a second example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 40 shows the case where the game ball passes through the gate member 20 during power restoration in the normal game state (when the power restoration command is received) (that is, when the right hand is hit during the power restoration in the normal game state) ) is assumed.
Specifically, until the timing T1, the power is turned off, and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as indicated by hatched lines.
Then, when the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts the restoration process, and the image display device 26 displays "Restoring screen display".
At this time, on layer 1, the screen display returning information is drawn, and on layer 6, the information is not drawn.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are synthesized, and the above-mentioned "returning to screen display" is displayed.

At timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives the gate passage subcommand. In this case, as described with reference to FIG. 38, left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) is drawn in layer 6, and a voice prompting left-handed hitting is output from the speaker 10. FIG. However, since the screen display returning information is still drawn in layer 1, although the left-handed information (left-handed image 26r) is drawn, when the layers are synthesized and displayed on the image display device 26, the layer 1 Due to the display content, it is not visible, and the speaker 10 is designed to notify only the voice "Please hit left".

Then, at timing T3, when the return condition is established, the display during the screen display return is ended, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which sub-patterns and the like are visibly displayed. Satisfaction of the return condition here may be the passage of a predetermined time, or the reception of a predetermined command (for example, a pattern stop command, a demo command, etc.).
Further, when the image display device 26 is restored, the left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) is displayed so as to be visible.
At this time, layer 1 is undrawn and nothing is displayed (drawn), and when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the display contents of layer 2 and subsequent layers are visible. Therefore, left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) is visible.

In this way, when the game ball passes through the gate member 20 while the power supply is being restored in the normal game state, the image display device 26 performs only screen display recovery, and only the speaker 10 reports to prompt left-handed hitting. I tried to do it with
As a result, for example, by visually recognizing the image display device 26, the manager can grasp that the screen display is being restored when the power supply is restored, and the player hears the notification from the speaker 10 prompting him to hit left. Thus, even if the left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) is not displayed, the game to be played (left-handed hitting) can be understood.
In addition, as indicated by timing T2, even when the screen display is returning and the left-handed information (left-handed image 26r) is not visible, the left-handed information (left-handed image 26r) is drawn on layer 6. I made it Layers 1 to 7 are synthesized and displayed.
As a result, regardless of whether power is restored or not, processing such as synthesizing and displaying layers 1 to 7 can be uniformly shared. For example, although a gate passage subcommand is received, since power is being restored, left-handed information (left-handed image 26r) is not drawn on layer 6. It is possible to eliminate the unique processing during power restoration, and uniform , and drawing left-handed information (left-handed image 26r) in layer 6 when a gate passage subcommand is received.

It should be noted that the volume value of "Please hit left" output from the speaker 10 at the timing T2 may or may not depend on the currently set volume value.
If it does not depend on the currently set volume value, the maximum volume value may be output.
When relying on the currently set volume value, the player can hear the notification prompting the player to hit left with the volume value desired by the player, and the game can proceed comfortably.
For example, when outputting at the maximum volume value without depending on the currently set volume value, the player is assured to hit left even if the left hitting information (left hitting image 26r) is not displayed. can be recognized.

In addition, in FIG. 40, at the timing T2, it is assumed that the speaker 10 notifies only the voice, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light-emitting device 9 may also be used to suggest hitting left. Specifically, at the timing T2, the light emitting device 9 may be flashed at high speed to suggest hitting left, or only the left side of the light emitting device 9 may emit light to suggest hitting left. good too.

In FIG. 40, the case of power recovery (when a power recovery command is received) has been described as an example, but the same applies when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

In addition, in FIG. 40, it is described assuming a case where a right shot is made during power restoration in the normal game state, but it is not limited to this. An event in which the game ball is stationary (for example, an event in which the game ball is stuck between the center role and the game nail) occurs, and accidentally during the power restoration in the normal game state It is also possible to assume an irregular case in which the game ball is no longer stationary and has passed through the gate member 20 .

In this embodiment, the right-handed hitting indicator 29c is provided, but the left-handed hitting indicator is not provided, so in the case (timing T2) of FIG. There is no way to confirm that.
Therefore, the above-described left-handed indicator may be provided, and the left-handed indicator may be lit at the timing T2.
As a result, even if the left-handed hitting information (left-handed hitting image 26r) cannot be visually recognized on the image display device 26, the left-handed hitting state can be visually recognized on a separate left-handed hitting display.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 40, the game ball is passed through the gate member 20 and the normal pattern hit determination process is performed. If the game ball enters the second start port 22, the icon ( The symbol variation game is executed by entering the game ball into the second starting port 22 without displaying the variation icon and the pending icon. As a result, the symbol variation game is executed even though the icon is not displayed. can be suggested.
Further, in the example of FIG. 40, the normal symbol hit determination process is performed by passing the game ball through the gate member 20. However, the normal symbol hit determination process itself is not performed. Alternatively, the normal symbol hit determination process may be performed, but "256/256" may be the normal symbol loss.

(Diagram for explaining a second example (another example) of the notification mode)
Next, a second example (another example) of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 41, the description of the parts common to FIG. 40 will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly described.

FIG. 41 shows another example of FIG. That is, FIG. 41 is when receiving a start port-related subcommand (particularly, a subcommand indicating that a game ball has entered the first start port 21) during power restoration in a time-saving gaming state (probability variable gaming state is also possible) (That is, when left-handed hitting is performed in the time-saving game state) is assumed.
Specifically, until timing T1, the power supply is OFF, the image display device 26 is also OFF (not displayed) as indicated by hatching, and the right-handed lamp (right-handed indicator 29c) is displayed. are also extinguished as indicated by hatched lines.
When the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts the restoration process, the image display device 26 displays "returning screen display", and the right-handed lamp (right-handed display 29c) lights up.
At this time, on layer 1, the screen display restoration information is drawn, and on layer 6, the information is not drawn.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are synthesized, and the above-mentioned "returning to screen display" is displayed.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives the start port-related subcommand. In this case, right-handed hitting information (right-handed hitting image 26s) is drawn on the layer 6, and a sound prompting right-handed hitting is output from the speaker 10. FIG. However, since the screen display returning information is still drawn in Layer 1, although the right-handed information (right-handed image 26s) is drawn, when the layers are synthesized and displayed on the image display device 26, Layer 1 The display contents make it invisible, and the speaker 10 outputs a voice saying "Please hit to the right" and the notification is given by lighting the right-hand hitting lamp (right-hand hitting indicator 29c).

Then, at timing T3, when the return condition is established, the display during the screen display return is ended, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which sub-patterns and the like are visibly displayed. Satisfaction of the return condition here may be the passage of a predetermined period of time, or the reception of a predetermined command (for example, a pattern stop command, a demo command, etc.).
Further, when the image display device 26 is restored, the right-handed hitting information (right-handed hitting image 26s) is visibly displayed.
At this time, layer 1 is undrawn and nothing is displayed (drawn), and when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the display contents of layer 2 and subsequent layers are visible. Therefore, right-handed information (right-handed image 26s) is visible.
In this way, when the gaming state receives a starting port-related subcommand (particularly, a subcommand indicating that a game ball has entered the first starting port 21) during power restoration in a time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) However, an effect similar to that described with reference to FIG. 40 can be obtained.

Further, during the restoration of the power supply, the initial operation of the movable body 28 is performed as described above, so the display contents of the image display device 26 become difficult to see, but the right-handed lamp (right-handed display 29c) is used for the initial operation. Since it is not affected, it is possible to understand the game to be played (left-handed) by checking the right-handed lamp (right-handed display 29c).

It should be noted that the volume value of "Please hit right" output from the speaker 10 at the timing T2 may or may not depend on the currently set volume value.
If it does not depend on the currently set volume value, the maximum volume value may be output.
When relying on the currently set volume value, the player can hear the notification prompting the player to hit to the right with the volume value desired by the player, and the game can proceed comfortably.
For example, when outputting at the maximum volume value without depending on the currently set volume value, the player is assured to hit to the right even if the hitting to the right information (the hitting to the right image 26s) is not displayed. can be recognized.

In addition, in FIG. 41, at the timing T2, it is assumed that the speaker 10 notifies only the voice, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light-emitting device 9 may also be used to suggest hitting to the right. Specifically, at timing T2, the light-emitting device 9 may be flashed at high speed to suggest hitting right, or only the right side of the light-emitting device 9 may emit light to suggest hitting right. good too.

In FIG. 41, the case of power recovery (when a power recovery command is received) has been described as an example, but the same can be applied when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

In addition, in FIG. 41, although described assuming a case where left-handed hitting is performed during power restoration in the time saving game state, it is not limited to this, for example, on the left side of the game area 7 and the first start port 21 An event in which the game ball is stationary above (for example, an event in which the game ball is stuck between the center role and the game nail) occurs, and the power supply is accidentally restored in the time-saving game state An irregular case may be assumed in which the game ball is no longer stationary and has passed through the first starting port 21 .

In the example of FIG. 41, when the game ball entered the first starting hole 21, the game ball entered the first starting hole 21 without displaying the icon (the variation icon, the hold icon). A pattern variation game by chance is executed. As a result, the symbol variation game is executed even though the icon is not displayed. can be suggested.
Further, in the example of FIG. 41, the configuration is such that the special symbol hit determination process is performed by entering the game ball into the first starting port 21, but the special symbol hit determination process itself is not performed. Alternatively, the special symbol hit determination process may be performed, but "319/319" may be lost.

(Diagram for explaining the third example of the notification mode)
Next, a third example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 42 assumes that the player adjusts the volume while waiting for a customer in the normal game state.
Specifically, when the image/sound CPU 204 receives a volume value/light value related subcommand (a subcommand related to volume value in the example of FIG. 42) at timing T1, the speaker icon image 26p and the Draw volume value information corresponding to the current volume value (level gauge image corresponding to volume value 3).
In addition, the speaker 10 outputs "mi♪", which is the adjustment sound corresponding to the volume value of 3.
In FIG. 42, the volume value is 3 until timing T1, and the operation at timing T1 indicates the initial operation of the cross key button 16. In FIG. That is, the volume value is 3 even after timing T1.

Then, at timing T2, when a volume value/light intensity value related subcommand (a volume value change (decrease) subcommand in the example of FIG. 42) is received, layer 3 responds to the speaker icon image 26p and the current volume value. Volume value information (level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2) is drawn.
In addition, the speaker 10 outputs the adjustment sound "re♪" corresponding to the volume value 2. FIG.
Note that timing T2 is the second operation of the cross key button 16 following the initial operation at timing T1, so the volume value is 2 and the volume value is decreased by one step.
When the volume is adjusted by the player while waiting for a customer in the normal game state, such a mode occurs.

(Diagram for explaining the fourth example of the notification mode)
Next, a fourth example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 43 assumes a case where the player adjusts the volume (or adjusts the amount of light) during power recovery (when a power recovery command is received).
Specifically, until the timing T1, the power supply is turned off, and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as indicated by diagonal lines. Note that the volume value at this time is 3.
Then, when the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts the restoration process, and the image display device 26 displays "Restoring screen display".
At this time, the screen display returning information is drawn on the layer 1, and the information on the layer 3 is not drawn.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are synthesized, and the above-mentioned "returning to screen display" is displayed.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a volume value/light intensity value related subcommand (a subcommand related to volume value in the example of FIG. 43). In this case, the speaker icon image 26p and the volume value information corresponding to the current volume value (level gauge image corresponding to volume value 3) are drawn on Layer 3. FIG.
In addition, the speaker 10 outputs "mi♪", which is the adjustment sound corresponding to the volume value of 3.
However, since the screen display recovery information is still drawn in layer 1, the layer is synthesized and displayed on the image display device 26 although the volume value information (level gauge image corresponding to volume value 3) is drawn. Sometimes, it is not visible due to the display content of layer 1, and only the adjustment sound "mi♪" by the speaker 10 is notified.
In FIG. 43, the volume value is 3 until timing T1, and the operation at timing T1 indicates the initial operation of the cross key button 16. In FIG. That is, the volume value is 3 even after timing T1.

Then, at timing T3, when a volume value/light intensity value related subcommand (a volume value change (decrease) subcommand in the example of FIG. 43) is received, layer 3 responds to the speaker icon image 26p and the current volume value. Volume value information (level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2) is drawn.
In addition, the speaker 10 outputs the adjustment sound "re♪" corresponding to the volume value 2. FIG.
However, since the screen display recovery information is still drawn in layer 1, the layer is synthesized and displayed on the image display device 26 although the volume value information (level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2) is drawn. Sometimes, it is not visible due to the display content of the layer 1, and only the adjustment sound "re♪" by the speaker 10 is notified.
Note that timing T3 is the second operation of the cross key button 16 following the initial operation at timing T1, so the volume value is changed to volume value 2, and the volume value is decreased by one step. In other words, although the level gauge image corresponding to the volume value 2 cannot be visually recognized, the processing to change the volume value from 3 to 2 has been performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having to operate the cross key button 16 again after the return condition is met.

At timing T4, when the return condition is satisfied, the display during the screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-patterns and the like are visibly displayed. The establishment of the return condition here may be the passage of a predetermined time, or the reception of a predetermined command (for example, special symbol variation pattern designation command, demo command, etc.).
Further, when the image display device 26 is restored, the volume value information (the level gauge image corresponding to the volume value 2) is visibly displayed. It should be noted that since the adjustment sound "re♪" by the speaker 10 is a single sound, it is not output at the timing T4.
At this time, layer 1 is undrawn and nothing is displayed (drawn), and when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the display contents of layer 2 and subsequent layers are visible. Therefore, volume value information (level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2) is visible.

In this way, when the volume is adjusted while the power supply is restored, the image display device 26 performs only the restoration of the screen display, and only the speaker 10 is used to notify the user of the volume adjustment.
As a result, for example, by visually recognizing the image display device 26, the administrator can grasp that the screen display is being restored at the time of power restoration, and the player can hear the adjustment sound from the speaker 10 to obtain the volume value information. Even if is not displayed, you can understand that the volume is being adjusted.
In addition, even when the screen display is being restored during power supply restoration, if the volume is adjusted, the volume value is changed. can be prevented from occurring.
Further, as indicated by timings T2 and T3, even when the screen display is being restored and the volume value information cannot be visually recognized, the volume value information corresponding to the current volume value is drawn. Layers 1 to 7 are synthesized and displayed.
As a result, regardless of whether power is restored or not, processing such as synthesizing and displaying layers 1 to 7 can be uniformly shared. For example, although a volume value/light intensity value subcommand is received, since the power is being restored, it is possible to eliminate the unique processing during power restoration, such as not drawing the volume value information in Layer 3. It is possible to perform processing such as drawing volume value information in layer 3 when a value/light amount value subcommand is received.

In FIG. 43, the case of power recovery (when a power recovery command is received) has been described as an example, but the same applies when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

In the example of FIG. 43, if the volume is adjusted while the message "Restoring screen display" is being displayed, an adjustment sound corresponding to the current volume value or the adjusted volume value is output. However, for example, when an operation to decrease the volume value (operation of the left direction button of the cross key button 16) is performed when the current volume value is the lowest volume value level 1, the adjustment sound "do♪" may be output, or the adjustment sound "do ♪" may be silenced without being output. Similarly, when an operation to increase the volume value (operation of the right direction button of the cross key button 16) is performed when the current volume value is the maximum volume value level 5, the adjustment sound "So♪" is played. It may be output, or it may be silent without outputting the adjustment sound "So♪".
As a result, when outputting the adjustment sound, the same sound (Do ♪ or So ♪) will be output continuously, so even if the level gauge image corresponding to the current volume value is not visible, It can be made to recognize that the volume value cannot be adjusted any more.
Also, even when the adjustment sound is not output, for example, when the left direction button of the cross key button 16 is operated continuously, the adjustment sound is suddenly not output and the sound becomes silent, so that the volume value cannot be adjusted any more. can be recognized.

(Diagram for explaining the fifth example of the notification mode)
Next, a fifth example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 44 assumes a case where a game ball enters the first start hole 21 during execution of the symbol variation game in the normal game state.
Specifically, when the image/sound CPU 204 receives the starting port-related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 44, the subcommand related to entering the first starting port 21) at timing T1, the number holding information and Draw icon information. In addition, the speaker 10 outputs a winning sound "Piron♪" indicating that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 21 and a normal holding icon is displayed in the first starting hole first held ball image display area 26g. be done.
Note that in FIG. 44, layers 1 to 7 are always synthesized and displayed both before timing T1 and after timing T1.
In this manner, notification is given when a game ball enters the first start hole 21 during execution of the symbol variation game in the normal game state.

(Diagram for explaining the sixth example of the notification mode)
Next, a sixth example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 45 assumes a case where a game ball enters the first start hole 21 during power recovery in the normal game state (when a power recovery command is received).
Specifically, until the timing T1, the power supply is turned off, and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as indicated by diagonal lines.
Then, when the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts the restoration process, and the image display device 26 displays "Restoring screen display".
At this time, in layer 1, the screen display returning information is drawn, and in layer 2, only the number suspension information related to number suspension is 0 is drawn.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are synthesized, and the above-mentioned "returning to screen display" is displayed.
Although the number reservation information is drawn on the layer 2, when the layers are synthesized and displayed on the image display device 26, the display contents of the layer 1 make it invisible.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives the starting hole related subcommand (the subcommand related to entering the ball into the first starting hole 21 in the example of FIG. 45). In this case, the variable icon to be displayed in the variable icon display area 26o and the number pending information "0" related to the number pending in layer 2 are drawn.
In addition, the speaker 10 outputs a winning sound "Piron♪" indicating that the game ball has entered the first start hole 21 and the normal variable icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 26o.
However, since the screen display returning information is still drawn in layer 1, the number reservation information "0" related to the number reservation and the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 26o are drawn, but the layer is synthesized. When it is displayed on the image display device 26, it is not visible due to the display content of the layer 1, and only the winning sound "Piron♪" is announced by the speaker 10.例文帳に追加

Then, at timing T3, when the return condition is established, the display during the screen display return is ended, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which sub-patterns and the like are visibly displayed. Satisfaction of the return condition here may be the passage of a predetermined time, or the reception of a predetermined command (for example, a pattern stop command, a demo command, etc.).
Further, when the image display device 26 is restored, the number suspension and the variation icon are displayed in a visible manner, and the BGM that is output during the variation display is output.
At this time, layer 1 is undrawn and nothing is displayed (drawn), and when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the display contents of layer 2 and subsequent layers are visible. Therefore, the number holding and the change icon are visible.

In this way, when a game ball enters the first start port 21 during power recovery (when a power recovery command is received), the image display device 26 performs only screen display recovery, and the game ball enters the ball. The notification is made only by the speaker 10.例文帳に追加
As a result, for example, by visually recognizing the image display device 26, the administrator can grasp that the screen display is being restored at the time of power restoration, and the player can hear the prize winning sound from the speaker 10 to receive the number reservation information. Even if the icon information is not displayed, it can be understood that the game ball has entered the start hole.
Further, as indicated by timing T2, even when the screen display is restored and the number reservation information and the icon information are not visible, the number reservation information and the icon information are drawn. Layers 1 to 7 are synthesized and displayed.
As a result, regardless of whether power is restored or not, processing such as synthesizing and displaying layers 1 to 7 can be uniformly shared. For example, although the start port-related subcommand is received, since the power is being restored, it is possible to eliminate the unique processing during power restoration, such as not drawing the number reservation information and icon information in Layer 2. It is possible to perform processing such as drawing number reservation information and icon information in layer 2 when a start port-related subcommand is received.

In FIG. 45, the case of power recovery (when a power recovery command is received) has been described as an example, but the same applies when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

In addition, although the game ball entered the first start port 21 during the power restoration in the normal game state (when the power restoration command is received), if it is already stored up to the above-mentioned "fourth storage area" , the speaker 10 does not announce the winning sound. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the ball is entered into the first start hole 21 in a situation where up to the "fourth storage area" is stored.

(Diagram for explaining a sixth example (another example) of the notification mode)
Next, a sixth example (another example) of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 46, the explanation of the parts common to FIG. 45 is omitted, and the different parts are mainly explained.

FIG. 46 differs from FIG. 45 in that the display modes of the main pending display and the sub pending display are added.
Specifically, until the timing T2, the pending number counter is 3, and the main pending display and the sub pending display are indicated by "⊙∘".
Then, at timing T2, when a starting port-related subcommand (a subcommand related to entering the ball into the first starting port 21 in the example of FIG. 46) is received, the pending number counter becomes 4, the main pending indicator, and The sub-hold indicator is displayed with "◎◎".
After that, when the return condition is satisfied at timing T3, the display during the screen display return is ended, and the image display device 26 returns to the state in which the sub-patterns and the like are displayed in a visible manner. The satisfaction of the return condition here may be that a predetermined time has passed, or that a predetermined command (for example, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a symbol stop command, a demo command, etc.) has been received.
That is, at the timing T2, although the number reservation information and the icon information are not visible, the notification of the winning sound by the speaker 10 can be heard, and the winning notification is given by updating the display of the main reservation display and the sub-retention display. is visible.
As a result, even if the number reservation information and icon information are not visible, the winning can be visually recognized (confirmed) separately by the main reservation display and the sub-reservation display.
Further, during the restoration of the power supply, the initial operation of the movable body 28 is performed as described above, so that the display contents of the image display device 26 become difficult to see. Since it is not affected, winning can be visually recognized (confirmed) by checking the main pending display and sub pending display.

In FIG. 46, the case of power recovery (when a power recovery command is received) has been described as an example, but the same applies when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

(Diagram for explaining the seventh example of the notification mode)
Next, a seventh example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the display mode of the icon in the above-described hold prefetch effect and the light emission mode of the starting port light emitting device 21a interlocked with the display mode of the icon.
Specifically, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a starting port-related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 47, a subcommand related to entering the first starting port 21) at timing T1, and the starting port-related subcommand is If it indicates a pending look-ahead effect (blue), the change scenario is referred to, and the number pending information and icon information (blue) are drawn in Layer 2.
Then, by synthesizing and displaying the layers 1 to 7, "Δ" indicating a blue reserved icon is displayed in the first start opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26j.
In addition, the speaker 10 outputs a prize winning sound "Poron♪" to inform that the blue pending icon is displayed due to the entry of the ball into the first start hole 21. - 特許庁
In addition, the light emission drive CPU 208 receives the starting hole-related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 47, the subcommand related to the ball entering the first starting hole 21) at timing T1, and the starting hole-related subcommand receives the pending look-ahead effect ( blue), the starting port light emitting device 21a is caused to emit blue light.
In this way, when the ball enters the first starting hole 21, a blue pending icon is displayed, and in conjunction with this, it is reported that the starting hole light emitting device 21a emits blue light.

Then, when the image/sound CPU 204 receives the variation pattern-related subcommand at timing T2, it refers to the change scenario (in FIG. Draw pending information and icon information (yellow).
Then, by synthesizing and displaying the layers 1 to 7, a yellow reserved icon "☆" is displayed in the first start opening third reserved ball image display area 26i.
In addition, the speaker 10 outputs a changing sound "Keep!" to notify that the icon has been updated to a yellow hold icon.
Further, when receiving the variation pattern-related subcommand at timing T2, the light emission drive CPU 208 causes the starting port light emitting device 21a to emit yellow light.
In this way, when the next symbol variation game is executed, a yellow pending icon is displayed, and in conjunction with this, it is notified that the starting port light emitting device 21a emits yellow light.

(Diagram for explaining the eighth example of the notification mode)
Next, an eighth example of notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.
Note that FIG. 48 shows an example in which the pending look-ahead effect explained in FIG. 47 is started from the entry of the ball at the time of power restoration. Therefore, the description of the parts common to FIG. 47 will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly described.

Specifically, until the timing T2, the starting hole light emitting device 21a is turned off. subcommand), and if the start-up related subcommand indicates a pending look-ahead effect (blue), refer to the change scenario and draw number pending information and icon information (blue) in layer 2 . However, in layer 1, since the screen display returning information is drawn continuously from timing T1, although the number pending information and the icon information (blue) are drawn, when the layers are synthesized and displayed on the image display device 26 is invisible due to the display content of layer 1.
At the timing T2, the speaker 10 outputs a prize winning sound "Poron♪" for notifying that the blue pending icon is displayed (actually invisible) due to the ball entering the first starting hole 21.例文帳に追加
Also, at the timing T2, the starting port light emitting device 21a emits blue light.

Then, when the return condition is established at timing T3, the display during the screen display return is ended, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-patterns and the like are displayed in a visible manner. Satisfaction of the return condition here may be the passage of a predetermined time, or the reception of a predetermined command (for example, a pattern stop command, a demo command, etc.).
At this time, since the layer 1 is not drawn, the variable icon of "Δ" showing blue color is visibly displayed in the variable icon display area 26o.
In this way, when the game ball enters the first starting port 21 and the pending look-ahead effect is started while the power supply is being restored (when the power supply restoration command is received), the image display device 26 performs only screen display restoration. , the announcement of the hold look-ahead effect is performed by the speaker 10 and the starting light emitting device 21a.
As a result, for example, by visually recognizing the image display device 26, the manager can grasp that the screen display is being restored at the time of power restoration, and the player can hear the winning sound from the speaker 10 and the start opening. By visually recognizing the light emission mode of the light emitting device 21a, it is possible to understand that the pending read-ahead effect has started even if the number pending information or the icon information is not displayed.
Further, as indicated by timing T2, even when the screen display is restored and the number reservation information and the icon information are not visible, the number reservation information and the icon information are drawn. Layers 1 to 7 are synthesized and displayed.
As a result, regardless of whether power is restored or not, processing such as synthesizing and displaying layers 1 to 7 can be uniformly shared. For example, although the start port-related subcommand is received, since the power is being restored, it is possible to eliminate the unique processing during power restoration, such as not drawing the number reservation information and icon information in Layer 2. It is possible to perform processing such as drawing number reservation information and icon information in layer 2 when a start port-related subcommand is received.

During the restoration of the power supply, the initial operation of the movable body 28 is performed as described above, so that the display contents of the image display device 26 become difficult to see. , It is possible to visually recognize (confirm) that the pending prefetch effect has been started by confirming the starting port light emitting device 21a.

In FIG. 48, the case of power recovery (when a power recovery command is received) has been described as an example, but the same can be applied when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

(Diagram for explaining the ninth example of the notification mode)
Next, a ninth example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 49 shows that when a starting port-related subcommand (in particular, a subcommand indicating that a game ball has entered the first starting port 21) is received during power restoration in a time-saving gaming state (probability variable gaming state is also possible) (that is, , when hitting to the left in the time-saving game state), and is a diagram explaining the characteristics of the light emission mode of the starting port light emitting device 21a in that case.

Specifically, until the timing T1, the power is turned off, and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as indicated by hatched lines.
Then, when the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts recovery processing, and the image display device 26 displays "Restoring screen display".
At this time, in layer 1, the screen display returning information is drawn, and in layer 2, only the number suspension information related to number suspension is 0 is drawn.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are synthesized, and the above-mentioned "returning to screen display" is displayed.
Although the number reservation information is drawn on the layer 2, when the layers are synthesized and displayed on the image display device 26, the display contents of the layer 1 make it invisible.
Further, the starting port light emitting device 21a and the speaker lamp 10a are turned off, and the right-handed lamp (right-handed indicator 29c), not shown, is lit.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives the starting port-related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 49, the subcommand related to entering the first starting port 21). , and draws right-handed information (right-handed image 26s) on layer 6 (not shown). However, in layer 1, since the screen display returning information is drawn continuously from timing T1, although the number reservation information and right-handed information are drawn, when the layers are synthesized and displayed on the image display device 26, the layer The display content of 1 makes it invisible.

Further, at timing T2, the starting port light emitting device 21a and the speaker lamp 10a are turned off. Incidentally, the extinguishment here means that the starting port light emitting device 21a and the speaker lamp 10a remain extinguished even though the game ball has entered the first starting port 21. FIG.
For example, in the case of the starting port light emitting device 21a, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21, it can emit light in any color shown in FIG. When a game ball enters the mouth 21, any color shown in FIG. 31 is not emitted.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, even if it is "white", which is a mere winning notification without pending look-ahead effect, it does not emit light, and the special symbol hit determination process performed by entering the ball. Even if the result is a hit, it will not emit light in the "rainbow".
In addition, if the speaker lamp 10a is used, if the game ball enters the first start port 21 and hits the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, it can emit light in any color shown in the flash effect at the time of winning. When a game ball enters the first start hole 21 during power restoration in a game state, it is designed not to emit light in any color. In addition, the fact that no color is emitted may mean that the execution lottery for the flash performance at the time of prize winning itself may not be performed, or as a result of the execution lottery for the flash performance at the time of prize winning, any color may not be illuminated.
With this configuration, for example, when a game ball is entered into the first starting hole 21 in the normal game state, the starting hole light emitting device 21a emits light in one of the colors shown in FIG. When the game ball enters the first start port 21 during power restoration in the time saving game state, it does not emit light in any color (even white light does not emit light), so that the player can feel uncomfortable. It is possible to indirectly notify that the player is not playing an optimal game (that the first starting hole 21 is not the starting hole to which a ball should be entered).
In addition, the speaker lamp 10a emits light even though the optimal game for the player is not being played (the first starting hole 21 is not the starting hole to which the ball should be entered), so that the first starting hole 21 does not play the game. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that ball entry is the optimum game.

The example of FIG. 49 is a case where a game ball enters the first start port 21 during power restoration in the time saving game state, but a game ball enters the first start port 21 during power restoration in the normal game state. When the ball enters the ball, as described with reference to FIG. 48, it is possible to light the starting hole light emitting device 21a, and it is also possible to light the speaker lamp 10a.

Then, when the return condition is satisfied at timing T3, the display during the screen display return is ended, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-patterns and the like are displayed in a visible manner. Satisfaction of the return condition here may be the passage of a predetermined period of time, or the reception of a predetermined command (for example, a pattern stop command, a demo command, etc.).
Further, when the image display device 26 is restored, the number suspension is displayed so as to be visible, and the BGM that is output during the variable display is output.
At this time, layer 1 is undrawn and nothing is displayed (drawn), and when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the display contents of layer 2 and subsequent layers are visible. Therefore, the number reservation is visible.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 49, when an event such as entering a game ball into the first start port 21 during power restoration in the time saving game state occurs, the icon corresponding to the entering ball (the change icon, pending icon) are not displayed. That is, the icon information is not drawn in layer 2 at timing T2, the variable icon is not displayed on the image display device 26 at timing T3, and the symbol variable game is not displayed even though the variable icon is not displayed. An event such as being executed is occurring.

In FIG. 49, the case of power recovery (when a power recovery command is received) has been described as an example, but the same applies when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

(Diagram for explaining a ninth example (another example) of the notification mode)
Next, a ninth example (another example) of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 50, description of parts common to FIG. 49 will be omitted, and parts different from FIG. 49 will be mainly described.

FIG. 50 assumes a case where a game ball is entered into the second starting port 22 during power restoration in the normal game state. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, even in the normal game state, the opening and closing member of the second starting port 22 may be opened, so the game is opened to the second starting port 22. It is possible to enter the ball.
On the other hand, as described above, when it is configured not to hit the normal game in the normal game state, the case where the game ball enters the second start port 22 in the normal game state is, for example, in the time-saving game state, the second A game ball about to enter the second start port 22 is caught in the process of the closing operation of the opening/closing member of the second start port 22, the state is shifted to the normal game state, and the state is changed to the normal game state. is resolved, and the game ball that was about to enter the second starting port 22 enters the second starting port 22.

Specifically, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a starting port-related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 50, a subcommand related to entering the second starting port 22), and in layer 2, Draws number reservation information, and draws left-handed information (left-handed image 26r) on layer 6 (not shown). However, in layer 1, since the screen display returning information is drawn continuously from timing T1, although the number reservation information and left-handed information are drawn, when the layers are synthesized and displayed on the image display device 26, the layer The display content of 1 makes it invisible.

Further, at timing T2, the starting port light emitting device 21a and the speaker lamp 10a are turned off. That is, even if a game ball is entered into the second starting hole 22 during power restoration in the normal game state, the starting hole light emitting device 21a and the speaker lamp 10a do not emit light.
For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed by the ball entering is a hit, the starting port light emitting device 21a will not emit "rainbow" light.
In this way, even if the game ball is entered into the second starting hole 22 during the restoration of the power supply in the normal game state, the optimal game for the player is not performed (the second starting hole 22 does not enter the ball). It is possible to indirectly notify that it is not the starting port that should be started.

Then, when the return condition is established at timing T3, the display during the screen display return is ended, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-patterns and the like are displayed in a visible manner. Satisfaction of the return condition here may be the passage of a predetermined time, or the reception of a predetermined command (for example, a pattern stop command, a demo command, etc.).

In FIG. 50, the case of power recovery (when a power recovery command is received) has been described as an example, but the same applies when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

(Diagram for explaining the tenth example of the notification mode)
Next, a tenth example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 51 assumes that an error occurs during power restoration.
Specifically, until the timing T1, the power supply is turned off, and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as indicated by diagonal lines.
Then, when the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts the restoration process, and the image display device 26 displays "Restoring screen display".
At this time, in layer 1, the screen display returning information is drawn.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are synthesized, and the above-mentioned "returning to screen display" is displayed.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives an error-related subcommand (a subcommand related to radio wave error in the example of FIG. 51). In this case, in layer 1, the screen display returning information and the error information related to the radio wave error are drawn.
Then, the layers 1 to 7 are synthesized, and the image display device 26 displays a display during restoration of screen display and a radio wave error 26u that informs that a radio wave error has occurred.
At the same time, the speaker 10 outputs a warning sound and a sound announcing a radio wave error.

Then, when the return condition is established at timing T3, the display during the screen display return is ended, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-patterns and the like are displayed in a visible manner. The satisfaction of the return condition here may be the passage of a predetermined time, or the reception of a predetermined command (for example, special symbol variation pattern designation command, demo command, etc.).
It should be noted that although the display during the recovery of the screen display ends when the recovery condition is satisfied, it is assumed that the radio wave error has not been resolved yet, so the error information related to the radio wave error continues to be drawn on Layer 1. A radio wave error 26 u is displayed on the image display device 26 . At the same time, the speaker 10 outputs a warning sound and a sound announcing a radio wave error.
In this way, when an error occurs during power restoration, information related to the error is displayed together with the display during restoration of the screen display. At the same time, the speaker 10 outputs a warning sound and a sound for notifying a radio wave error. As a result, the administrator can quickly understand that an error has occurred during power restoration.

In FIG. 51, the case of power recovery (when a power recovery command is received) has been described as an example, but the same applies when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

Also, in FIG. 51, the occurrence of a radio wave error has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a similar notification may be made for other errors.

(Diagram for explaining the eleventh example of the notification mode)
Next, an eleventh example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 52 assumes a case where the power is cut off during a winning game and then the power is restored, and in particular, shows the features related to the notification mode when over winning occurs at the big winning opening 24 during the power restoration. there is
Specifically, until the timing T1, the power is ON and the winning game is being performed. At this time, the layer 1 is not drawn, the right-handed information (right-handed image 26s) is drawn on the layer 6, and the jackpot information (for example, the total prize number image 26v obtained in the winning game) is drawn on the layer 7. is drawn. Then, layers 1 to 7 are combined and displayed to display an image during a winning game.

Then, at timing T1, the power is turned off (the power is cut off), and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as indicated by hatched lines.
After that, when the power is turned on at the timing T2, the main CPU 101 starts the return processing, and the image display device 26 displays "Returning the screen display, please continue the game".
At this time, on layer 1, the screen display returning information is drawn, on layer 6, right-handed information (right-handed hitting image 26s) is drawn, and on layer 7, big win information is drawn. However, since the screen display returning information is drawn in layer 1, although the right-handed information (right-handed image 26s) and the jackpot information are drawn, when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the layer The display content of 1 makes it invisible.
Also, after the interruption is permitted between the timing T2 and the timing T3, the big winning opening 24 is opened.

Then, at timing T3, the image/sound CPU 204 receives the big winning hole related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 52, the subcommand related to the big winning hole entering ball detection signal). It should be noted that the sub-command related to the big winning opening corresponds to the above-described over-winning.
At this time, the speaker 10 outputs the sound "Pilline♪" to notify that an over-winning has occurred at the big-winning opening 24. - 特許庁
It should be noted that the number of prize balls obtained by the over winning is added to the total number of prize balls image 26v in layer 7 and drawn. For example, when the total number of awarded balls image 26v until timing T2 is "488", the total number of awarded balls image 26v of "500" is drawn in layer 7. However, since the screen display returning information is drawn in layer 1, when the layers are synthesized and displayed on the image display device 26, the display content of layer 1 makes it invisible.
Then, when the return condition is established at timing T4, the display during the screen display return is ended, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the image during the winning game is visibly displayed. Satisfaction of the return condition here may be the passage of a predetermined time, or a predetermined command (for example, a command to open a large winning slot, which is sent when the large winning slot is opened, or a It may be a case where a command for closing the big winning opening to be sent, etc.) is received.
When the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the image during the winning game is visibly displayed, the image during the winning game (for example, the total number of winning balls image 26v after addition) is visibly displayed again. will be

In this way, when over-winning occurs at the big winning port 24 while the power supply for the winning game is restored, the image display device 26 displays the information during restoration of the screen display, and the over-winning is notified only by the speaker 10. I tried to do it.
As a result, for example, by visually recognizing the image display device 26, the administrator can grasp that the screen display is being restored at the time of power restoration, and the player can see that the number of prize balls obtained by over winning is equal to the total number of prize balls. Although the addition to the image 26v cannot be visually recognized, the occurrence of the over-winning can be recognized by separately listening to the sound output from the speaker 10 that notifies that the over-winning has occurred.

Also, as indicated by timing T3, even when the screen display is being restored and the jackpot information (particularly, the total number of prize balls image 26v) cannot be visually recognized, the prize balls obtained by over winning in layer 7 The number is drawn by adding it to the total winning ball number image 26v. Layers 1 to 7 are synthesized and displayed.
As a result, regardless of whether power is restored or not, processing such as synthesizing and displaying layers 1 to 7 can be uniformly shared. For example, a sub-command related to a big winning hole entrance detection signal is received, but since the power is being restored, the jackpot information (particularly, the total number of prize balls image 26v) is not drawn on Layer 7. Processing can be made unnecessary, and processing such as drawing jackpot information (particularly, total number of winning balls image 26v) in layer 7 when receiving a sub-command related to the detection signal of the winning ball entering the big winning hole can be uniform. can.

In FIG. 52, the case of power recovery (when a power recovery command is received) has been described as an example, but the same can be applied when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

It should be noted that the over-winning may be notified not only by the speaker 10 but also by causing the light-emitting device 9 to emit light. For example, when an over-winning occurs, the light may be emitted in a color different from the light emitted up to that point.

(Diagram for explaining a twelfth example of the notification mode)
Next, a twelfth example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 53 assumes a case where a power failure occurs during a winning game and then the power is restored, and in particular, shows the features related to the notification mode when a ball enters the normal winning hole 23 while the power is restored. ing.
Specifically, until the timing T1, the power is ON and the winning game is being performed. At this time, layer 1 is not drawn, layer 4 is not drawn, right-handed information (right-handed image 26s) is drawn on layer 6, and jackpot information (for example, total obtained in a winning game) is drawn on layer 7. The prize number image 26v, etc.) are drawn. Then, layers 1 to 7 are combined and displayed to display an image during a winning game.

Then, at timing T1, the power is turned off (the power is cut off), and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as indicated by hatched lines.
After that, when the power is turned on at the timing T2, the main CPU 101 starts the return processing, and the image display device 26 displays "Returning the screen display, please continue the game".
At this time, the screen display returning information is drawn on the layer 1, the layer 4 is not drawn, the right hitting information (right hitting image 26s) is drawn on the layer 6, and the jackpot information is drawn on the layer 7. It is However, since the screen display returning information is drawn in layer 1, although the right-handed information (right-handed image 26s) and the jackpot information are drawn, when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, the layer The display content of 1 makes it invisible.

Then, at timing T3, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a normal winning hole related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 53, a subcommand related to a normal winning hole entering ball detection signal). At this time, the speaker 10 is outputting a sound "Charlene♪" to notify that a game ball has entered the normal winning hole 23.例文帳に追加
It should be noted that the number of winning balls obtained by entering the normal winning hole is added to the total number of winning balls image 26v and drawn in layer 7. FIG. Also, in Layer 4, winning notification information for the normal winning opening (entering ball notification image 26w) is drawn. However, since the screen display returning information is drawn in layer 1, when the layers are synthesized and displayed on the image display device 26, the display content of layer 1 makes it invisible.

Then, when the return condition is established at timing T4, the display during the screen display return is ended, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the image during the winning game is visibly displayed. Satisfaction of the return condition here may be the passage of a predetermined time, or a predetermined command (for example, a command to open a large winning gate (not shown) sent when the large winning gate is opened, It may be a case where a command for closing the big winning opening to be sent, etc.) is received.
When the image display device 26 returns to the state of visually displaying the image during the winning game, the image during the winning game (for example, the total number of winning balls image 26v after addition) is displayed again. Become.
Also, at timing T4, the sub-command related to the normal winning hole detection signal is received again, and the winning notification information for the normal winning hole (ball entry notification image 26w) is drawn in layer 4. FIG. As a result, on the image display device 26, a ball entry notification image 26w such as "+1", which notifies that one game ball has entered the normal winning hole 23, is displayed in a visible manner. At the same time, the speaker 10 outputs the sound "Charlene♪" to notify that the game ball has entered the normal winning hole 23.例文帳に追加

In this way, when a ball enters the normal winning hole 23 while the power supply of the winning game is restored, the image display device 26 displays the information during restoration of the screen display to inform the ball entering the normal winning hole 23. is performed only with the speaker 10.
As a result, for example, by visually recognizing the image display device 26, the administrator can grasp that the screen display is being restored at the time of power restoration, and the player can see the ball entry notification image 26w due to the ball entering the normal winning hole 23. is not visually recognized, but by separately listening to the sound output from the speaker 10 notifying that the ball has entered, it is possible to recognize that the ball has entered the normal winning hole 23 .

Also, as indicated by timing T3, even when the screen display is returning and the big win information (in particular, the ball entry notification image 26w) cannot be visually recognized, it is drawn in layer 4. FIG. Layers 1 to 7 are synthesized and displayed.
As a result, the process of synthesizing and displaying layers 1 to 7 can be uniformly shared regardless of whether power is restored or not. For example, a sub-command related to a normal winning hole entrance ball detection signal is received, but since the power supply is being restored, jackpot information (in particular, the ball entry notification image 26w) is not drawn on Layer 4. Unique processing during power supply restoration. can be dispensed with, and when a subcommand related to the normal winning hole entry detection signal is received, the jackpot information (in particular, the entry notification image 26w) can be drawn in Layer 4.

(Regarding Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 2 in normal gaming state and variable probability gaming state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the trigger 1 and trigger 2 in the normal game state and the trigger 1 and trigger 2 in the variable probability game state will be described. Incidentally, FIG. 54 is a simple time chart for explaining the opportunity 1 and the opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state, and the opportunity 1 and the opportunity 2 in the variable probability gaming state.

First, it is assumed that the opportunity 1 in the normal game state is that the winning game (special symbol C) is won at the timing (a) (the winning symbol is confirmed and displayed). In this case, the winning game is executed over the timing (b). Then, when the winning game ends at the timing (b), the state shifts to the time-saving game state from the timing (b).
That is, it indicates that the process of step S105-5-18 described above has shifted to the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state that operates (shifts) by the trigger 1 is started from the timing (b).

Next, the timing 2 in the normal game state is when the normal game state game number counter becomes "0" at timing (a) (main RAM clear, time when the time saving game state ends or time when the time saving game state starts) We assume that
From there, it is assumed that the symbol variation game has been played "1000" times in succession without winning a winning game. That is, at the timing (b), the normal game state game number counter becomes "1000", and from the timing (b), the game shifts to the time-saving game state.
That is, it indicates that the process of step S105-4-12-10 described above has shifted to the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state that operates (shifts) by the opportunity 2 from the timing (b) is started.

As described above, in the normal game state, both the time-saving game state that operates (transitions) with the opportunity 1 and the time-saving game state that operates (transitions) with the opportunity 2 are executable.

Next, the opportunity 1 in the variable probability gaming state is assumed to have hit the winning game (special symbol F) at the timing (a) (the winning symbol has been confirmed and displayed). In this case, the winning game is executed over the timing (b). Then, when the winning game ends at the timing (b), the state shifts to the time-saving game state from the timing (b).
That is, it indicates that the process of step S105-5-18 described above has shifted to the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state that operates (shifts) by the trigger 1 is started from the timing (b).

Next, the opportunity 2 in the probability variation gaming state assumes that the probability variation gaming state game number counter has become "0" at timing (a) (when the winning state ends).
From there, it is assumed that the symbol variation game has been played "1000" times in succession without winning a winning game. That is, the variable probability gaming state game number counter becomes "1000" at the timing (b), but the variable probability gaming state continues without changing the gaming state after the timing (b). Also, the normal symbol state shown in FIG. 5 is "state B" from the timing (a) to the timing (b) and after the timing (b).

That is, in the variable probability game state, even if the variable probability game state game number counter becomes "1000", the normal game state game number counter becomes "1000". As a result, it is possible to prevent the most advantageous variable probability game state from ending after the game is not obtained per ``1000'' times and shift to a short-time gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the variable probability game state. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost.

As described above, in the variable probability gaming state, the time-saving gaming state that operates (shifts) by the opportunity 1 is executable, and the time-saving gaming state that operates (shifts) by the opportunity 2 is not executable.

In this way, in the normal game state, the time-saving game state that operates (shifts) by the opportunity 1, and the time-saving game state that operates (shifts) by the opportunity 2 can be executed, while in the variable probability game state, the opportunity The time-saving game state that operates (shifts) by 1 is executable, but the time-saving game state that operates (shifts) by Trigger 2 is not executable, so the normal game state has the opportunity to shift to the time-saving game state. become more. As a result, it is possible to prevent the normal game state from becoming significantly disadvantageous compared to the variable probability game state. As a result, the disadvantageous impression of the normal game state is eliminated, so that the decline in the interest in the game can be prevented.

It should be noted that, in the variable probability gaming state, it may be possible to execute a time-saving gaming state that operates (shifts) by the opportunity 2. For example, when the probability variable game state game number counter reaches "1000", "state B" may be executed "100" times (rewrite from infinite state B to finite state B). In this case, the game state itself may be shifted from the variable probability game state to the time saving game state, or may remain in the variable probability game state.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to give a sense of urgency that the state B will end if a winning game is not obtained, and prevent the variable probability game state from becoming a monotonous game.

Also, the probability variation gaming state game number counter is not necessarily required. In other words, in the variable probability gaming state, it is not necessary to count the number of games. In other words, since the counting is not performed, even if the symbol variation game is continuously played "1000" times without winning the winning game, the time saving game state by the opportunity 2 may not be activated. Thereby, the number-of-games counter provided in the main RAM 103 can be reduced.

(About Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 2 in normal game state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the timing 1 and the timing 2 in the normal game state will be explained. Note that FIG. 55 is a simple time chart for explaining trigger 1 and trigger 2 in the normal game state (particularly, the period from when the symbol is displayed to the time it shifts to the time-saving game state). It should be noted that descriptions of portions that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

First, the opportunity 1 assumes that the special symbol C is definitely displayed at the timing (a). In this case, the winning game is executed over the timing (b). Then, when the winning game ends at the timing (b), it shifts to the opening in the time-saving game state (time-saving OP). In this time-saving OP, a display such as "○○ RUSH rush! (100 times)" is displayed on the image display device 26, for example.

Then, when the time saving OP ends at the timing (c), the game state shifts to the time saving game state from the timing (c).
That is, it indicates that the process of step S105-5-18 described above has shifted to the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state that operates (shifts) by the trigger 1 is started from the timing (c).

Next, the opportunity 2 assumes that the symbol variation game has been played "1000" times continuously without winning the winning game up to the timing (a). Then, it is assumed that the “1000th” symbol variation game was lost and the special symbol D was confirmed and displayed.

Then, when the special symbol D is confirmed and displayed at the timing (a), the game shifts to the opening in the time-saving game state (time-saving OP). In addition, the opening time, the opening effect, etc. in the time saving OP may be the same as the opportunity 1, or may be different from the opportunity 1. For example, when it is the opportunity 2, a dedicated opening time, an opening effect, etc. may be set.

Then, when the time saving OP ends at the timing (b), the game state shifts to the time saving game state from the timing (b).
That is, it indicates that the process of step S105-4-12-10 described above has shifted to the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state that operates (shifts) by the opportunity 2 from the timing (b) is started.

Comparing the trigger 1 and trigger 2, the period from the timing (a) when the pattern is confirmed and displayed to the opening in the time saving game state, and the timing (a) when the pattern is confirmed and displayed is transferred to the time saving game state. The period until the moment 1 is longer because the winning game is involved, and the moment 2 is shorter because the winning game is not involved. In this way, the timing 1 and the timing 2 are different in the period from the time the pattern is displayed until it shifts to the time-saving OP, and the time period until it shifts to the time-saving game state. can be provided.
In particular, in the opportunity 2, immediately shifting to the time-saving OP and then shifting to the time-saving game state is suitable for a player whose playing time is limited.

(About Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 2 in normal game state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the timing 1 and the timing 2 in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 56 is a simple time chart for explaining the timing 1 and the timing 2 in the normal game state (especially when both the conditions for establishing the timing 1 and the timing 2 are satisfied in the same symbol variation game). It should be noted that descriptions of portions that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

It should be noted that the "condition to establish the opportunity 1" is intended to hit a winning game (for example, special symbol C). That is, the opportunity 1 is to move to the time-saving game state in the process of step S105-5-18 described above, and in order for the process of step S105-5-18 to be performed, it is essential to hit the winning game. That's why. Therefore, the “condition for establishing the opportunity 1” is “to win the winning game” which is essential for the process of step S105-5-18 to be performed.

Timing (a) assumes that the number-of-games counter in the normal game state has reached "0" (when the main RAM is cleared, when the time-saving game state ends, or when the time-saving game state starts). From there, it is assumed that the symbol variation game has been played "1000" times in succession without winning a winning game. That is, the normal game state game number counter is "1000" at the timing (b).

Then, it is assumed that the symbol variation game performed at this timing (b) wins the winning game (wins the special symbol C). In other words, although the counter for the number of games played in the normal game state becomes "1000" and the formation of the trigger 2 is satisfied, since the winning game is won in the symbol variation game (hit the special symbol C), the trigger 1 is separately performed. This situation also satisfies the conditions for the establishment of

In such a case, the winning game is shifted from the timing (b), and when the winning game is finished at the timing (c), the time saving game state is shifted from the timing (c). It should be noted that this time-saving game state is the one that has been shifted in the process of step S105-5-18 described above, that is, the one that is activated at the opportunity 1.

Therefore, although the counter for the number of games played in the normal game state becomes "1000" and the formation of the trigger 2 is satisfied, the winning game is won in the symbol variation game (the special symbol C is won). Then, with the opportunity 1 (preferentially), after that, it will be shifted to the time-saving game state.

In particular, in the case of opportunity 1, the amount of transition to the time-saving game state through the winning game (the amount of prize balls obtained in the winning game) is more advantageous for the player than the transition to the time-saving game state at opportunity 2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money by shifting to the time-saving gaming state while securing the player's profit. In this way, by providing a plurality of opportunities for transitioning to the time-saving game state, the amusement of the game is improved, and when any of the occasions overlap, the player is shifted to the time-saving game state while securing the profit of the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

It should be noted that, at the timing (b), it is assumed that the special symbol C is won as the trigger 1, but if it is a special symbol related to winning, both the special symbol A and the special symbol B can be handled in the same manner as in FIG. . However, both the special symbols A and B are special symbols that shift to the variable probability game state after the end of the winning game. good. That is, at the timing (b), when both the condition for establishing the trigger 1 and the trigger 2 are satisfied in the same symbol variation game, the trigger 1 is used (prioritized), and then the state is shifted to "state B". You can interpret.

(About Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 2 in normal game state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the timing 1 and the timing 2 in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 57 is a simple time chart for explaining the trigger 1 and trigger 2 in the normal game state (particularly, the symbol variation game performed immediately before shifting to the time saving game state).
The symbol variation game that is performed immediately before shifting to the time-saving gaming state corresponds to the symbol variation game that leads to the winning game in case of trigger 1, and the normal game state game number counter is "1000" in case of trigger 2. This corresponds to the symbol variation game.
It should be noted that descriptions of portions that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

First, in the case of opportunity 1, variation patterns 6 to 11 in FIG. 8 can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. In other words, in the case of the opportunity 1, reach always occurs in the immediately preceding symbol variation game.

Also, as the big-hit announcement performance, the above-mentioned big-hit announcement performance A, big-hit announcement performance B, and big-hit announcement performance C can be selected. That is, in the case of the opportunity 1, in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, the big win notice effect A, the big win notice effect B, and the big win notice effect C can be selected, and the selection of the so-called premium notice is also possible.
It should be noted that there is a tendency that the big-hit announcement performance B is easy to select between the big-hit announcement performance A and the big-hit announcement performance B.

Then, when the symbol variation game is finished at timing (b) and the symbols are confirmed and displayed (hit), a winning game is started, and when the winning game is finished at timing (c), the game shifts to a time-saving game state.

Next, in the case of opportunity 2, variation patterns 1 to 5 in FIG. 8 can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. In other words, in the case of opportunity 2, a reach may or may not occur in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. For example, in a pattern variation game in which the number-of-games counter in the normal game state is "1000", if the determination information is stored only in the variation storage area, reach is likely to occur, and the number-of-games counter in the normal game state is In the symbol variation game with "1000", if the determination information is stored up to the fourth storage area, it is difficult for reach to occur.

Also, as the big-hit announcement performance, the above-described big-hit announcement performance A and big-hit announcement performance B can be selected. In other words, in the case of the opportunity 2, the big win notice effect A and the big win notice effect B can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, and the so-called premium notice cannot be selected.
It should be noted that there is a tendency that the big-hit announcement performance A is easy to select between the big-hit announcement performance A and the big-hit announcement performance B.例文帳に追加

Then, when the symbol variation game is finished at timing (b) and the symbols are confirmed and displayed (lost), the game shifts to a time-saving game state.

When the timing 1 and the timing 2 are compared, in the case of the timing 1, the ready-to-win always occurs in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, but in the case of the timing 2, the ready-to-win may or may not occur.
Further, in the case of Trigger 1, a premium notice can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, but in the case of Trigger 2, the premium notice cannot be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game.
Further, in the case of Trigger 1, it is easy to select the big hit announcement effect B with a high degree of winning expectation for the winning game in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, but in the case of Trigger 2, the degree of winning expectation for the winning game in the immediately preceding symbol variation game is easy to select. It is easy to select the jackpot announcement performance A with a low .
From such a tendency, from the contents of the symbol variation game (presence or absence of reach, contents of big hit notice effect), it is possible to infer which trigger shifts to the time-saving gaming state. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the immediately preceding symbol variation game, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The contents of the symbol variation game are not limited to those shown in FIG. For example, in the case of opportunity 1, a plurality of kinds of big hit notice performances are likely to occur in combination, and in the case of opportunity 2, a plurality of kinds of big hit notice performances may be made difficult to occur in combination. Similar effects can be obtained in this way as well.

In addition, in the case of the opportunity 2, there is a case where the reach does not occur in the immediately preceding symbol variation game. In this case, the main ROM 102 may store a special symbol variation pattern table dedicated to the "1000th" symbol variation game.
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the possibility of a winning game from disappearing due to the absence of a reach, and to prevent an early shift to the time-saving game state by the opportunity 2 from being detected. That is, it is possible to give expectation to the transition to the time-saving game state by the opportunity 1 until the symbols are displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 57, the timing 1 and the timing 2 in the normal game state have been described, but the timing 1 and the timing 2 in the variable probability gaming state may be configured in the same way.

(Notification mode in a game in which the normal game state game number counter reaches a predetermined counter)
Next, as a supplement to FIG. 56, an example of a notification mode in a game in which the number-of-games counter in the normal game state becomes a predetermined counter (for example, "1000") will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 58 shows a notification mode in the image display device 26 when the selectable variation pattern is not restricted (variation without reach is also selectable). It should be noted that the image display device 26 includes only the minimum required information, and some of the description is omitted as appropriate.

First, when a variation pattern (for example, variation patterns 3, 5, 7, and 9) for reaching is selected, a ready-to-win effect is performed in which the player's character image and the enemy character image battle each other. For example, on the image display device 26, an image such as "Battle Start!" is displayed to indicate that these character images will fight each other.

Then, if the determination result of the special symbol win determination process is a hit (for example, special symbol C), an image in which the character image on the player side has won over the enemy character image is displayed, and the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is displayed. If the game is lost, an image in which the player's character image is defeated by the enemy character image is displayed. For example, in the case of a win, the image display device 26 displays an image such as "WIN!" , and sub-pattern "434" are displayed.
If the determination result of the special symbol win determination process is a win and the above-described reverse effect is performed (reverse win), an image such as "LOSE..." or an image such as a sub symbol "434" is displayed. After that, an image such as "WIN!" and an image such as a sub symbol "444" are displayed.

Then, in the case of winning, the winning game is started after that, and an image saying "Start winning game!" is displayed on the image display device . Then, when the winning game ends, the game shifts to a time-saving game state.
In addition, in the case of a loss, after confirming and displaying the losing pattern, the game shifts to a time-saving game state. Then, on the image display device 26, an image such as "Rush into ○○ RUSH! 100 times", which is the opening effect of the time-saving game state, is displayed.

On the other hand, when a variation pattern (for example, variation pattern 1) that does not reach is selected, for example, an image suggesting transition to a time-saving gaming state is displayed along with the start of the symbol variation game. For example, on the image display device 26, an image such as "This game is a rush to ○○RUSH!" is displayed.

Then, a losing pattern (for example, 526) is confirmed and displayed, and when the confirmation display is performed, the game shifts to a time-saving game state. Then, on the image display device 26, an image such as "Rush into ○○ RUSH! 100 times", which is the opening effect of the time-saving game state, is displayed.

In such a notification mode, if ready-to-win is executed, it is possible to have expectations for transition to the time-saving game state by opportunity 1 until the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and if ready-to-win is not executed, the pattern With the start of the variable game, the shift to the time-saving game state by the opportunity 2 can be grasped promptly. In particular, if the ready-to-win is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from being circumvented by quickly grasping the transition to the time-saving game state by the opportunity 2 as soon as the symbol variation game is started. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game in the middle of the symbol variation game and not being able to obtain the privilege of shifting to the time-saving game state.

(Notification mode in a game in which the normal game state game number counter reaches a predetermined counter)
Next, as a supplement to FIG. 56, an example of a notification mode in a game in which the number-of-games counter in the normal game state becomes a predetermined counter (for example, "1000") will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 59 shows a notification mode in the image display device 26 when the selectable variation patterns are restricted (always select reach), which is a different example from FIG.

When reach is performed, an image such as "Battle Start!" is displayed as described above. Then, if the determination result of the special symbol win determination process is a hit (for example, special symbol C), an image in which the character image on the player side has won over the enemy character image is displayed, and the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is displayed. If the game is lost, an image in which the player's character image is defeated by the enemy character image is displayed. For example, in the case of a win, the image display device 26 displays an image such as "WIN!" , and sub-pattern "434" are displayed.
If the determination result of the special symbol win determination process is a win and the above-described reverse effect is performed (reverse win), an image such as "LOSE..." or an image such as a sub symbol "434" is displayed. After that, an image such as "WIN!" and an image such as a sub symbol "444" are displayed.

Then, in the case of winning, the winning game is started after that, and an image saying "Starting the winning game!" is displayed on the image display device . Then, when the winning game ends, the game shifts to a time-saving game state.
In addition, in the case of a loss, the game shifts to a time-saving game state after confirming and displaying the lost symbol. Then, on the image display device 26, an image such as "Rush into ○○ RUSH! 100 times", which is the opening effect of the time-saving game state, is displayed.

With such a notification mode, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to the time-saving game state by the opportunity 1 until the symbol is finally displayed. As a result, the transition to the time-saving game state by the opportunity 2 is not decided early, and the interest in the game can be maintained.

(Regarding the time-saving gaming state transitioned at Trigger 1 and the time-saving gaming state transitioned at Trigger 2)
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the time-saving gaming state shifted at the opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state shifted at the opportunity 2 will be described. In addition, FIG. 60 is a simple time chart for explaining the time-saving gaming state shifted at the opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state shifted at the opportunity 2 (particularly, the display mode in the time-saving gaming state). It should be noted that descriptions of portions that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

First, the opportunity 1 assumes that the winning game (special symbol C) has been won at the timing (a) (the winning symbol has been confirmed and displayed). In this case, the winning game is executed over the timing (b). Here, in the winning game, the game result information can be displayed during the round or at the ending of the winning game. The game result information corresponds to a winning game number image 26x indicating the number of winning games and a total winning ball number image 26v indicating the number of winning balls obtained in the winning game. Then, when the winning game ends at the timing (b), the state shifts to the time-saving game state from the timing (b).

In the time-saving gaming state, the game result information can be displayed continuously, and in addition, a possible number-of-games image 26y indicating the number of possible games in the time-saving gaming state is displayed.
Timing (c) indicates the timing at which the symbol variation game is played 100 times in the time-saving gaming state. That is, the time-saving game state ends at the timing (c), and shifts to the time-saving game state ending (time-saving ED). At this time, in the image display device 26, the possible number of games image 26y is displayed as "0 times remaining", and an image (time saving end) indicating that the time saving game state has ended is displayed. In addition, the game result information can be continuously displayed even in the time saving ED.

It should be noted that the game result information may display the game results for a predetermined period. The predetermined period corresponds to, for example, one winning game (period of winning game→time saving game state) when the special symbol C is hit in the normal game state and shifts to the time saving game state. Also, for example, when the special symbol C is hit in the normal game state to shift to the time-saving game state, and in the time-saving game state, when the special symbol F is hit again to shift to the time-saving game state, two wins. The game (period of winning game → time saving game state → winning game → time saving game state) corresponds.

Next, the opportunity 2 assumes that the normal game state game number counter becomes "0" at the timing (a) (main RAM clear, time when the time saving game state ends or time when the time saving game state starts) there is From there, it is assumed that the symbol variation game has been played "1000" times in succession without winning a winning game. That is, the normal game state game number counter is "1000" at the timing (b).

Then, from the timing (b), it shifts to the time-saving game state. In this time-saving gaming state, the image display device 26 can display the possible number of games image 26y, but cannot display the game result information. That is, the opportunity 2, unlike the opportunity 1, because it does not shift to the time-saving game state via a winning game, in the case of the opportunity 2, the game result information is not displayed.

Timing (c) indicates the timing at which the symbol variation game is played "100" times in the time-saving gaming state. That is, the time-saving game state ends at the timing (c), and shifts to the time-saving game state ending (time-saving ED). At this time, in the image display device 26, the possible number of games image 26y is displayed as "0 times remaining", and an image (time saving end) indicating that the time saving game state has ended is displayed. In addition, the game result information cannot be displayed continuously even in the time saving ED.

The “100”th symbol variation game (losing) in the time saving game state corresponds to satisfaction of the end condition of the time saving game state, but the time saving ED may be executed at any timing. For example, the time saving ED may be executed during execution of the "100" symbol variation game (losing), or the time saving ED may be performed after the confirmation display of the "100" symbol variation game (losing). . In the former case, the game result information will be displayed during execution of the "100" symbol variation game (losing), and in the latter case, the "100" symbol variation game (losing) will be confirmed and displayed. The game result information will be displayed later. When the time-saving ED is executed during execution of the "100" symbol variation game (loss), the time-saving ED is started at the start of the symbol variation game, and when the time-saving ED is finished, the symbol is determined and displayed.

Also, even if the "100" symbol variation game in the time saving game state is successful (step S105-2-9), the time saving ED may be executed during execution of the "100" symbol variation game. . In this case, by executing the time saving ED, it is possible to make it appear that the time saving game state has ended, and to notify that it is winning in reverse. As a result, execution of the time saving ED does not necessarily result in notification of the end of the time saving game state, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest in the game.

As described above, in the time saving game state and the time saving game state ending, the game result information is displayed at the opportunity 1, but the game result information is not displayed at the opportunity 2.例文帳に追加As a result, it becomes easy to understand when the game result information is displayed or not, which triggers the transition to the time-saving game state.
In particular, any background image may be used (this will be discussed in FIG. 64), but it is more effective when the same background image is used for Trigger 1 and Trigger 2. Although it is not clear from the image when the transition to the time-saving game state occurred, it is possible to grasp when the time-saving game state occurred depending on whether or not the game result information is displayed.
As described above, in the state game state, suitable display according to the situation is possible.

In addition, in the time-saving ED, an image relating to "suggestion of setting" or an "addiction prevention" image for preventing excessive play may be displayed. An image related to "setting suggestion" is an image that suggests which setting value is set in the case where there are multiple stages of setting values as described above. For example, by providing an image or the like that can be selected only when the setting value 6 is set, it is possible to let the player know with certainty that an advantageous setting value is set. there is
The "prevention of addiction" image is, for example, a message image such as "Let's play the game machine moderately."

Then, such an image may be displayed in both the time saving ED of opportunity 1 and the time saving ED of opportunity 2, or one of the time saving EDs may be displayed but the other time saving ED may not be displayed. Further, as for the image related to “setting suggestion”, for example, the time-saving ED of opportunity 2 may make it easier to select a setting suggestion image that definitely notifies a specific setting value. Opportunity 1 is a win-win game, and the player gets a prize ball, but Opportunity 2 does not involve a winning game, so when the time-saving game state ends, it is said to be disadvantageous compared to Opportunity 1. I can say. Therefore, by facilitating the selection of a setting suggestion image that definitely notifies a specific setting value, it is possible to give useful information to the player and prevent only the opportunity 2 from becoming disadvantageous.

In addition to the image "Right shot" shown in FIG. 60, an image "Aim right!" may be displayed. The image "Right shot" shown in FIG. 60 is, for example, an image that is always displayed when it is optimal to perform "Right shot", but the image "Aim right!" This is an image displayed sporadically. For example, if it is the trigger 1, it is displayed at timing (a) in FIG. 60 (timing 1), and is not displayed at timing (b). If it is the trigger 2, it is displayed at the timing (b) in FIG. 60 (timing 2).
As a result, if it is the opportunity 1, it is possible to prevent the player from being annoyed because the player has already hit to the right. Further, if it is the opportunity 2, the player can easily grasp the optimum game.

(Regarding the transition to the time-saving game state by Trigger 1 and the transition to the time-saving game state by Trigger 2)
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the transition to the time-saving game state by the opportunity 1 and the transition to the time-saving game state by the opportunity 2 will be described. Incidentally, FIG. 61 is a simple time chart for explaining the transition to the time-saving gaming state by the opportunity 1 and the transition to the time-saving gaming state by the opportunity 2 (in particular, the effect performed before the transition). It should be noted that descriptions of portions that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

First, the opportunity 1 assumes that the winning game (special symbol C) has been won at the timing (a) (the winning symbol has been confirmed and displayed). In this case, the winning game is executed over the timing (b). Here, in the winning game, a promotion effect may be performed as to whether or not the game state is shifted to the variable probability game state as the game state after the end of the winning game. For example, in the promotion effect, the special pattern B is determined, and the decorative pattern is the combination of "444" patterns, or the special pattern C is decided, and the decorative pattern is the combination of "444" patterns. It is executable when In this case, the former results in a successful promotion effect, and the latter results in a failure in the promotion effect.

In the promotion performance, during the winning game, the image display device 26 displays an image saying ``Press the button to get a probability variation!'' and an image simulating the performance button 14 to validate the operation of the performance button 14.例文帳に追加become

In the example of FIG. 61, it is assumed that the special symbol C has been determined, so as a result of operating the production button 14, an image indicating that the promotion production has failed・” image) is displayed.

Then, when the winning game ends at the timing (b), it shifts to the time-saving OP, and when the time-saving OP ends at the timing (c), it shifts to the time-saving game state.

Thus, in the opportunity 1, before shifting to the time-saving gaming state (for example, between the time the symbol is confirmed and shifted to the time-saving gaming state = during the winning game), the operation means (production button 14) is used. Then, an effect (promotion effect) of whether or not to shift to the variable probability gaming state is performed. In addition, since the promotion effect will shift to the time-saving game state as a result of failure, it can be read as a effect of whether to move to the time-saving game state (effect that suggests a transition to the time-saving game state). can.

Next, the trigger 2 assumes that the number-of-games counter in the normal game state has reached "1000" at the timing (a) and the special symbol D has been confirmed and displayed. Then, the time saving OP is performed from the timing (a) to the timing (b), and the game state shifts to the time saving game state from the timing (b).

Thus, in the opportunity 2, before shifting to the time-saving gaming state (for example, from the time the symbol is confirmed display to the time-saving gaming state = time-saving OP), using the operation means (production button 14) , The effect of whether to shift to the time saving game state is not performed.
Thus, in the opportunity 1, before shifting to the time-saving game state, the operation means (production button 14) is used to produce whether or not to shift to the time-saving game state, but in the opportunity 2, the time-saving game Before shifting to the state, the operation means (production button 14) is used, and the production of whether to shift to the time saving game state is not performed.
In particular, in the case of opportunity 1, if the promotion performance is successful, the state is shifted to the variable probability game state, and if the promotion performance is failed, the state is shifted to the time-saving game state. There is significance in informing whether to migrate. On the other hand, in the case of Opportunity 2, since the transition to the time-saving game state is confirmed (there is no other option), by making the transition to the time-saving game state without bothering to operate the production button 14 or the like, the player is relieved of annoyance. You can prevent giving.
As described above, the effect suggesting transition to the time-saving gaming state can be suitably performed according to the situation.

(Regarding the transition to the time-saving game state by Trigger 1 and the transition to the time-saving game state by Trigger 2)
Next, another example of promotion effect described in FIG. 61 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the description of the parts that overlap with FIG. 61 will be omitted as appropriate.

First, the trigger 1 assumes that the sub-symbol (444) corresponding to the special symbol C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing (a) (for the time being, the win is confirmed). The symbol variation game continues before and after the timing (a).

After that, although not shown, the sub-symbols are vertically scroll-displayed, and a re-lottery effect performed between the temporary stop display and the final display is executed. It should be noted that the re-lottery effect is a effect in which the temporarily stopped sub-symbol can be changed to another sub-symbol. For example, when the sub-symbol (444) corresponding to the special symbol B is temporarily stopped and displayed In the re-lottery effect, it is possible to change to another sub-symbol (333 = sub-symbol suggesting a shift to the probability variation gaming state), and the sub-symbol (444) corresponding to the special symbol C is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the case, it is impossible to change to another sub-symbol (333 = sub-symbol suggesting a transition to the variable game state) in the re-lottery effect, and as a result of the re-lottery effect, the sub-symbol (444 ) is displayed as a fixed display.

In the example of FIG. 62, it is assumed that the sub-symbol (444) corresponding to the special symbol C is temporarily stopped and displayed. is displayed and the re-lottery effect is executed, the sub-symbol to be confirmed and displayed is "444".
And after that, after passing through the winning game, it will shift to the time-saving game state.

It should be noted that such a re-lottery effect is not performed at the opportunity 2 . That is, the sub-design (526) corresponding to the loss at timing (a) is temporarily stopped and displayed, the special design D and the sub-design (526) are confirmed and displayed at timing (b), and the time saving OP is displayed at timing (b). Then, at the timing (c), it shifts to the time-saving game state.

In this way, in the opportunity 1, before the transition to the time-saving gaming state (especially between the temporary stop display and the final display), the operation means (the production button 14) is used to perform a re-lottery effect, but in the opportunity 2, Before shifting to the time-saving game state (particularly, between the temporary stop display and the final display), the operation means (performance button 14) is used to prevent the re-lottery performance.
As a result, an effect similar to that described with reference to FIG. 61 can be obtained.

In addition, the promotion effect of FIG. 61 and the re-lottery effect of FIG. Notification of whether to shift to the game state or to the time-saving game state, for example, whether the decorative pattern is a pattern that satisfies the transition to the probability variable game state or a pattern that satisfies the transition to the time-saving game state) Notification production correspond to

(Regarding the relationship between songs that can be output between Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 2)
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the relationship between songs that can be output at opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 will be described. FIG. 63 is a simple time chart for explaining songs that can be output when shifting to the time-saving game state at opportunity 1 and songs that can be output when shifting to the time-saving gaming state at opportunity 2. FIG. It should be noted that descriptions of portions that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

Here, the music is assumed to be, for example, a song sung by a singer or the like (for example, with lyrics). It is (cannot be selected in the normal game state). As a result, it is possible to raise the player's mood during the winning game or in the variable probability game state.

First, the trigger 1 assumes that the special symbol C is definitely displayed at the timing (a). After that, the winning game is performed until the timing (b).
In this winning game, music can be selected, and in the example of FIG. 63, it is assumed that music A is selected by the player operating the effect button 14 . Then, when the music A is selected, the music A is output from the speaker 10. - 特許庁

Then, when the winning game ends at the timing (b), it shifts to the time-saving OP, and when the time-saving OP ends at the timing (c), it shifts to the time-saving game state. In the time-saving game state, BGM is output from the speaker 10 during time-saving.

Here, the time-saving BGM is assumed to be, for example, a melody without lyrics of a song sung by a singer or the like, and in the time-saving game state, a single time-saving BGM is output.

Next, the trigger 2 assumes that the number-of-games counter in the normal game state has reached "1000" at the timing (a) and the special symbol D has been confirmed and displayed. Then, the time saving OP is performed from the timing (a) to the timing (b), and the game state shifts to the time saving game state from the timing (b).
Then, in the time-saving game state, the BGM during time-saving similar to the opportunity 1 is output from the speaker 10 .

Comparing the above-mentioned trigger 1 and trigger 2, the number of songs that can be output from the time when the pattern is confirmed and displayed to the transition to the time-saving game state is greater in trigger 1 than in trigger 2, because of the winning game. in a relationship. As a result, it is possible to give added value to the player who has obtained the right to shift to the time-saving game state through the winning game. In addition, in the opportunity 1, the music selected in the winning game may be output as it is in the time saving game state, or the music selection may be enabled even in the time saving game state. This makes it possible to further add value to opportunity 1 .

(Regarding the time-saving gaming state transitioned at Trigger 1 and the time-saving gaming state transitioned at Trigger 2)
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the time-saving game state shifted at the opportunity 1 and the time-saving game state shifted at the opportunity 2 will be described. In addition, FIG. 64 is a simple time chart for explaining the background image and the like of the time-saving gaming state shifted to the timing 1 and the time-saving gaming state shifted to the timing 2. FIG. It should be noted that descriptions of portions that overlap with FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

First, the trigger 1 assumes that the special symbol C is definitely displayed at the timing (a). After that, the winning game is performed until the timing (b). Then, when the winning game ends at the timing (b), it shifts to the time-saving OP, and when the time-saving OP ends at the timing (c), it shifts to the time-saving game state.

In the time-saving game state, the image display device 26 displays, for example, a background image of a car running on a road. In addition, BGM1 during time saving corresponding to the background image is output from the speaker 10 .

Next, the trigger 2 assumes that the number-of-games counter in the normal game state has reached "1000" at the timing (a) and the special symbol D has been confirmed and displayed. Then, the time saving OP is performed from the timing (a) to the timing (b), and the game state shifts to the time saving game state from the timing (b).

In the time-saving game state, the image display device 26 displays, for example, a background image that looks like a mountain. In addition, BGM2 during time saving corresponding to the background image is output from the speaker 10 .

When the opportunity 1 and the opportunity 2 are compared, the background image in the time saving game state and the BGM during the time saving are made different between the time saving game state shifted to the opportunity 1 and the time saving game state shifted to the opportunity 2.例文帳に追加As a result, it becomes easy to understand when the game state has shifted to the time saving game state, and it is possible to prevent the time saving game state from becoming boring due to differences in background images and BGM.

In FIG. 64, the background image in the time saving game state and the BGM during the time saving are different between the time saving game state shifted at the opportunity 1 and the time saving game state transferred at the opportunity 2. The background image in the time-saving game state and the BGM during the time-saving game state may be the same between the game state and the time-saving game state shifted at the opportunity 2. - 特許庁In this way, there is no need to change the background image or BGM depending on the occasion, which contributes to data reduction.

(Regarding the production mode in the normal game state after the time-saving game state ends)
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the production mode in the normal game state after the end of the time-saving game state will be described. The contents up to the timing (b) are, for example, the same as those in FIG. 64, so the description is omitted.

Both the time saving game state shifted at the opportunity 1 and the time saving game state shifted at the opportunity 2 shift to the normal game state when the time saving game state is ended at the timing (b). In the normal game state immediately after the end of this time-saving game state, the effect mode is shifted to a special mode.

This special mode is designed to shift only in the normal game state shortly after the end of the time-saving game state. Even if it is possible to switch the performance mode between C (both are normal modes), switching to the special mode is impossible.

That is, the special mode is positioned as a special effect mode that can be shifted only in the normal game state immediately after the end of the time-saving game state. In this way, by providing an effect mode that can be shifted only in the normal game state immediately after the time-saving game state ends, it is possible to display a background image or the like unfamiliar to the player, as if the time-saving game state continues. You will be able to give the feeling of being there. This prevents the player from quitting the game when the time-saving game state ends.

In addition, in the special mode, an effect that is not executed in the normal mode may be executed. For example, a mini-game using the effect button 14 or the like (for example, an effect in which the effect button 14 is pressed in time with the rhythm), or a pseudo-continuous effect may be generated frequently, or the setting suggestions described above may occur frequently. You may do so.

The special mode ends when the specified number of symbol variation games (for example, 20 times) are executed, and the timing (c) indicates the timing when the specified number of symbol variation games are performed. Then, at timing (c), the special mode is terminated and the normal mode is entered.

In this way, even if the game state shifts to the time-saving game state at any opportunity, it is made to shift to the special mode after the time-saving game state ends. As a result, for example, it is possible to increase the chances of shifting to the special mode, and to further improve the amusement of the game. In particular, when suggesting useful information in the special mode (for example, when suggesting the settings described above), it is effective to increase the chances of making such a transition.

(Regarding the time-saving gaming state transitioned at Trigger 1 and the time-saving gaming state transitioned at Trigger 2)
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the time-saving game state shifted at the opportunity 1 and the time-saving game state shifted at the opportunity 2 will be described. In addition, FIG. 66 is a simple time chart for explaining the relationship in the degree of advantage between the time-saving gaming state (appearance) shifted at the opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state shifted at the opportunity 2 . It should be noted that descriptions of portions that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

First, it is assumed that the trigger 1 is that the special symbol A is definite-displayed at the timing (a), and the combination of the sub-symbols "444" is definite-displayed. After that, the winning game is performed until the timing (b). Then, when the winning game ends at the timing (b), it shifts to the time-saving OP, and when the time-saving OP ends at the timing (c), it shifts to the time-saving game state.

In the time-saving game state, the image display device 26 displays, for example, a background image of a car running on a road (background image suggesting the time-saving game state). In addition, BGM1 during time saving corresponding to the background image is output from the speaker 10 .
Thus, the appearance of the image display device 26 and the BGM output from the speaker 10 correspond to the time-saving game state, but the actual game state is the probability variable game state.

Next, the trigger 2 assumes that the number-of-games counter in the normal game state has reached "1000" at the timing (a) and the special symbol D has been confirmed and displayed. Then, the time saving OP is performed from the timing (a) to the timing (b), and the game state shifts to the time saving game state from the timing (b). Then, a background image and BGM similar to those of the opportunity 1 are output. It should be noted that, if the opportunity 2, the actual game state is not a variable probability game state, always a time-saving game state.

Comparing Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 2, the background image and BGM during the time-saving gaming state are the same between the time-saving game state that transitioned with Opportunity 1 and the time-saving gaming state that transitioned with Opportunity 2, but in the case of Opportunity 1, , the possibility that the actual game state is the probability variable game state is also included. As a result, there is a case where the time saving game state shifted with the opportunity 1 is more advantageous between the time saving game state transferred with the opportunity 1 and the time saving game state transferred with the opportunity 2. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time-saving game state itself from becoming monotonous (feeling that the probability is always low) while reducing the data by standardizing the background image data and the BGM data.

(Regarding the time-saving gaming state transitioned at Trigger 1 and the time-saving gaming state transitioned at Trigger 2)
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the time-saving game state shifted at the opportunity 1 and the time-saving game state shifted at the opportunity 2 will be described. In addition, FIG. 67 is a simple time chart for explaining the effect selection between the time saving game state shifted at the opportunity 1 and the time saving game state shifted at the opportunity 2 in the variable probability game state. It should be noted that descriptions of portions that overlap with those in FIG. 54 may be omitted as appropriate.

First, although not particularly described above, the effect executed in the variable probability gaming state may be selected by the player by operating the effect button 14 or the like. In this case, one of a plurality of effect elements can be selected in the final round or ending of the winning game (see image display device 26 at timing (a) of opportunity 2).

For example, "character A", "character B", and "character C" are displayed as the effect elements, and the player can select any one of them. Then, when "character A" is selected, an effect corresponding to "character A" is executed, and when "character B" is selected, an effect corresponding to "character B" is executed, and "character When "C" is selected, an effect corresponding to "Character C" is executed.

And, in the example of the opportunity 1, it is assumed that the "character A" has been selected in the variable probability gaming state. That is, on the image display device 26, "character A" is displayed and the corresponding effect is being executed.

Timing (a) of the opportunity 1 assumes that the special symbol F has been confirmed and displayed. After that, the winning game is performed until the timing (b). Then, from the timing (c), it shifts to the time-saving game state.

Then, in the time-saving gaming state, the production element selected in the variable probability gaming state is inherited. That is, if it is an example of opportunity 1, since it is assumed that "character A" was selected in the variable probability game state, an effect corresponding to "character A" is executed even in the time saving game state. It should be noted that, in the variable probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state, it is only the "character" that is handed over, and the background image and the effect content are different. For example, in the variable-probability gaming state, an effect is executed in which "character A" battles a plurality of types of characters, but in the time-saving gaming state, an effect is executed in which "character A" battles a single character. be done.

In addition, the period (number of games) to be taken over in the time-saving gaming state may be any period (number). For example, it may be taken over (cannot be changed to another character) during the entire period of the time-saving game state (100 games), or only the first game of the time-saving game state may be taken over, and the next game It may be possible to change from to another character. In the first game, the performance is started with the character that has been taken over, but it may be possible to change to another character during the pattern variation game. Also, when changing to another character during the symbol variation game, only the selection operation may be accepted, and changing to another character may be performed in the next game.
When taking over in all periods, the production can be made consistent. Also, if the character can be changed to another character, for example, by changing to another character, the time-saving game state can be played with a new feeling.

Next, timing (a) of opportunity 2 assumes that the number-of-games counter in the normal game state has reached "1000" and the special symbol D has been confirmed and displayed. Then, the time saving OP is performed from the timing (a) to the timing (b), and the game state shifts to the time saving game state from the timing (b).

Then, using the time of the time-saving OP, a plurality of characters and an image simulating the production button 14 are displayed on the image display device 26, and the production prompting the user to select the character by operating the production button 14 is executed. .

In the example of opportunity 2, it is assumed that character A has been selected by the player, and an effect corresponding to character A is executed in the time-saving game state after timing (b).
In this way, the effect corresponding to the character selected by the player is executed even in the time-saving game state, so that the game interest in the time-saving game state can be improved. In addition, even in the time-saving game state shifted to at the opportunity 2, time is provided for the player to select a character, and during the time-saving game state, as in the case of the opportunity 1, by executing the production corresponding to the selected character, A constant sense of satisfaction can be given to a player who has not obtained a winning game over 1000 times of symbol variation games.

It should be noted that the characters that can be selected in the opportunity 1 and the opportunity 2 may be set in any way. As described above, the selectable characters may be the same in the event 1 and the event 2, the characters may be partially the same, or the selectable characters may be completely different.
When the selectable characters are the same, for example, even if the trigger 1 is not satisfied, by satisfying the trigger 2, the same production (character production) as the time-saving game state shifted by the trigger 1 can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to give satisfaction to the player.
If the selectable characters are (partially or entirely) different, there will be an effect (character) that is executed only at each opportunity, so the player's desire to play should be aroused so as to satisfy any opportunity. can be done.

(Regarding an update example of the normal game state game number counter)
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, an example of update of the normal game state game number counter (see FIG. 9) will be described.

Timing (a) is the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is ended, or the timing at which the main RAM 103 is initialized (cleared). Therefore, at the timing (a), the normal game state game number counter is "0", and the normal game state starts from the timing (a).

At the timing (b), it is assumed that a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 and the symbol variation game corresponding to the entering ball is executed. In this case, a prize ball payout is performed for the ball entering the first start port 21, and the number-of-games counter in the normal game state is incremented by "1".

At the timing (c), it is assumed that the game ball enters the second starting hole 22 and the symbol variation game corresponding to the entering ball is executed. In this case, a prize ball payout for the ball entering the second starting port 22 is performed, and the number-of-games counter in the normal game state is incremented by "1".

In this way, the number-of-games counter in the normal game state is updated when a ball is entered in the first starting hole 21 in the normal game state and the symbol variation game corresponding to the entering ball is executed, and the number of games played in the second starting hole 22 It is updated even when a ball is entered at a time and a symbol variation game corresponding to the entered ball is executed.

With such a configuration, when a game ball accidentally enters the second starting port 22, special symbol hit determination processing based on the ball entering the second starting port 22 (more advantageous than the first starting port 21) Since the normal game state game number counter is updated as well, the player can be given a sense of achievement, and the game interest can be further improved.

In the updated example of FIG. 69, in particular, the first starting hole 21 and the second starting hole 22 are arranged vertically, and the left-handed (or right-handed) ball can be entered into any of the starting holes. It is more preferable to use a board configuration that allows

(Regarding an update example of the normal game state game number counter)
Next, an update example (another example 1) of the normal game state game number counter (see FIG. 9) will be described with reference to FIG.

Timing (a) is the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is ended, or the timing at which the main RAM 103 is initialized (cleared). Therefore, at the timing (a), the normal game state game number counter is "0", and the normal game state starts from the timing (a).

In addition, the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is terminated may be replaced with the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is started.

At the timing (b), it is assumed that a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 and the symbol variation game corresponding to the entering ball is executed. In this case, a prize ball payout is performed for the ball entering the first start port 21, and the number-of-games counter in the normal game state is incremented by "1".

Timing (c) and timing (d) show that two game balls entered the second starting port 22 when the second starting port 22 opened once in 0.9 seconds. there is That is, the timing (c) is the first ball entry, and the timing (d) is the second ball entry.

In this case, timing (c) can be handled in the same way as timing (c) in FIG. However, the second ball entry at timing (d) is treated as invalid. In other words, the symbol variation game corresponding to the second entering ball is not executed, the winning ball payout for the entering ball into the second starting port 22 is not performed, and the normal game state game number counter is not updated. In addition, as an example, it is assumed that two game balls are entered by opening the second starting port 22 once, but the third and subsequent balls are of course treated as invalid.

By configuring in this way, for example, the act of illegally opening the second start port 22 and trying to receive the special symbol hit determination processing based on the ball entering the second start port 22, or the normal game state game It acts as a deterrent to updating the number counter.

In the updated example of FIG. 70, the first starting hole 21 and the second starting hole 22 are arranged vertically, and a left-handed (or right-handed) ball can be entered into any of the starting holes. The board surface configuration, the first start port 21 and the second start port 22 are arranged with a gap left and right, and the first start port 21 is hit left and the second start port 22 is hit right. It is suitable for any of the possible board configurations.

(Regarding an update example of the normal game state game number counter)
Next, an update example (another example 2) of the normal game state game number counter (see FIG. 9) will be described with reference to FIG.

Timing (a) is the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is ended, or the timing at which the main RAM 103 is initialized (cleared). Therefore, at the timing (a), the normal game state game number counter is "0", and the normal game state starts from the timing (a).

In addition, the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is terminated may be replaced with the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is started.

At the timing (b), it is assumed that a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 and the symbol variation game corresponding to the entering ball is executed. In this case, a prize ball payout is performed for the ball entering the first start port 21, and the number-of-games counter in the normal game state is incremented by "1".

Timing (c) indicates that the game ball entered the second starting port 22. In the updated example of FIG. 71, even if the first ball enters, It may be handled in the same manner as timing (d).

With this configuration, for example, when the optimum game is not played, the symbol variation game is not executed, prize ball payout is not performed, or the normal game state game number counter is not updated. , the player is notified that the optimum game is not played, and the player can be encouraged to play the optimum game.

In addition, in the updated example of FIG. 71, the first start port 21 and the second start port 22 are arranged to be left and right apart, and the first start port 21 is left-handed, and the second start port 22 is hit to the left. It is more suitable for use in a board configuration that allows a right-handed ball to be entered.

It should be noted that, in the above-described normal game state, even if the probability of being determined to be lost in the normal symbol winning determination process is set to "256/256", as shown in FIG. The number-of-games counter in the normal game state can be updated by executing the ball entry and the symbol variation game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73, the display mode of the time saving game state (especially the display mode at the end) and the display mode in the scene where the time saving game state is shifted to the normal game state will be described. In FIGS. 72 and 73, there are some parts of the image display device 26 that are necessary for explanation and are omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 72(a) shows a scene in which the time-saving game state remains four times. That is, the possible number of games image 26y indicating the remaining number of possible games in the time-saving gaming state is displayed as "four times remaining".
Also, in this scene, it is assumed that the player is hitting to the right and entering the game ball into the second starting hole 22 . That is, the sub-symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol reservation display 27d executes "blinking together" indicating that the number of reservations is "4", and the variation icon display area 26o, 2nd starting opening 1st reserved ball image display area 26k, 2nd starting opening 2nd reserved ball image display area 26l, 2nd starting opening 3rd reserved ball image display area 26m, 2nd starting opening 4th reserved ball image display area Icons are displayed in 26n, and each icon is positioned at the initial position (0) and is executing an action effect. Action effects will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 72(b) is a scene in which the time-saving game state remains three times. That is, the possible number of games image 26y indicating the remaining number of possible games in the time-saving gaming state is displayed as "three times remaining".
Also, in this scene, it is assumed that the player is hitting to the right and entering the game ball into the second starting hole 22 . That is, the sub-symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol reservation display 27d executes "blinking together" indicating that the number of reservations is "4", and the variation icon display area 26o, 2nd starting opening 1st reserved ball image display area 26k, 2nd starting opening 2nd reserved ball image display area 26l, 2nd starting opening 3rd reserved ball image display area 26m, 2nd starting opening 4th reserved ball image display area Icons are displayed in 26n, and each icon is positioned at the action position (2) and is executing an action effect. Operation position (2) will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 72(c) is the scene of the final variation of the time saving game state. That is, the possible number of games image 26y indicating the remaining number of possible games in the time-saving gaming state is displayed as "remaining 0".
Also, in this scene, it is assumed that the player is hitting to the right and entering the game ball into the second starting hole 22 . That is, the sub-symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol reservation display 27d executes "blinking together" indicating that the number of reservations is "4", and the variation icon display area 26o, 2nd starting opening 1st reserved ball image display area 26k, 2nd starting opening 2nd reserved ball image display area 26l, 2nd starting opening 3rd reserved ball image display area 26m, 2nd starting opening 4th reserved ball image display area Icons are displayed in 26n, and each icon is positioned at the action position (1) and is performing action effects. Operation position (1) will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 72(d) is a final display scene of the final variation of the time-saving gaming state. That is, the display of "finished time saving" for notifying that the time saving game state has ended, and the sub symbols "5, 1, 6", for example, are fixedly displayed.
In addition, in this scene, "blinking together" indicating that the number of reservations is "4" is executed on the second special symbol reservation display 27d, but the corresponding variable icon display area 26o is displayed with confirmation display. The variation icon is hidden, and the second start opening first reserved ball image display area 26k, the second start opening second reserved ball image display area 26l, and the second start opening third reserved ball image display on the image display device 26 All of the reserved icons in the area 26m and the second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n are also hidden.
Note that each display area may remain displayed while only the icons are hidden.

FIG. 73(e) shows the pattern corresponding to the reserved icon displayed in the first reserved ball image display area 26k of the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k in the first variation when the time saving game state is finished and the normal game state is entered. variation game). That is, a left-handed shot image is displayed to prompt left-handed shots. It is assumed that the player has not launched the game ball into the game area 7 .

Also, in this scene, the sub-symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and "one flashes, the other lights up" indicating that the number of reservations is "3" is executed on the second special symbol reservation display 27d. However, the variation icon display area 26o, the second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k, the second starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26l, the second starting opening third reserved ball image display area 26m, the second No icon is displayed in the second start opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26n.

That is, in the time-saving gaming state of FIG. 72(c), in particular, the second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k, the second starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26l, the second starting opening third reserved ball image 73(e), ( As indicated by f), (g), and (h), the symbol variation game is executed without displaying the variation icon and the pending icon on the image display device 26 . As a result, it is possible to prompt the player to enter the game ball into the first starting port 21 . In addition, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the time saving game state has not ended.

Also, in FIG. 73(e), since it is the first variation in the normal game state, the number-of-games counter in the normal game state is incremented by "1" along with the execution of the pattern variation game, and the value of the counter becomes "1". It has become.
In this way, in the time-saving gaming state, when the ball enters the starting hole and the execution of the symbol variation game corresponding to the entering ball is suspended, the normal gaming state is entered. When the pattern variation game is executed, the normal game state game number counter is updated.
As a result, more in the time-saving game state, for example, if the determination information is stored up to the "fourth storage area", although there is an upper limit, the counter is updated by the amount stored, so the player can give you a sense of achievement.

FIG. 73(f) shows the second change when the time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is entered (corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second start opening second hold ball image display area 26l in FIG. 72). symbol variation game), and the second special symbol suspension display 27d indicates that "both lights up" indicating that the number of suspensions is "2" is being executed.
In addition, in FIG. 73(f), since it is the second variation in the normal game state, the number-of-games counter in the normal game state is incremented by "1" along with the execution of the pattern variation game, and the value of the counter becomes "2". It has become.

In addition, FIG. 73(g) shows the third change when the time-saving game state ends and the normal game state (corresponds to the hold icon displayed in the second start port third hold ball image display area 26m in FIG. 72) symbol variation game), and the second special symbol reservation display 27d indicates that "one is lit, the other is extinguished" indicating that the number of reservations is "1" is being executed. .
Also, in FIG. 73(g), since it is the third variation in which the normal game state is entered, the normal game state game number counter is incremented by "1" along with the execution of the symbol variation game, and the counter value becomes "3". It has become.

In addition, FIG. 73(h) shows the fourth change when the time-saving game state ends and the normal game state (corresponds to the reserved icon displayed in the second starting port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n in FIG. 72). symbol variation game), and the second special symbol suspension display 27d indicates that "both lights off" indicating that the number of suspensions is "0" is being executed.
In addition, in FIG. 73(h), since it is the fourth variation in which the normal game state is entered, "1" is added to the normal game state game number counter along with the execution of the symbol variation game, and the counter value becomes "4". It has become.

In this way, when executing the symbol variation game corresponding to the game ball entering the second starting hole 22 in the time-saving gaming state, the symbol variation is not displayed on the image display device 26. run the game. That is, in the time-saving game state, for example, an action effect is executed as shown in FIG. 72(c), but in the normal game state, for example, as shown in FIG. I can say. As a result, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the time saving game state has not ended.

Note that the examples in FIGS. 72 and 73 are merely examples, and may be changed as appropriate.
For example, in FIG. 73, each time the symbol variation game is started, the symbol variation game may be started by displaying the variation icon only in the variation icon display area 26o. In other words, the single action effect may be executed while the action effect is not executed. As a result, at least the icon corresponding to the change is displayed, so that it is possible to alleviate the player's sense of incongruity. In addition, the player can be entertained by the execution of the single action effect.

In addition, FIG. 72 and FIG. 73 explained the transition from the time saving game state to the normal game state as an example, but it is not limited to this, and includes a game state transition such as shifting from the probability variable game state to the normal game state. In the case, it may be applied at the time of transition from the probability variation gaming state to the normal gaming state.

In addition, it may be applied at the time of transition from the normal game state to the time-saving game state or probability variation game state. For example, 1st starting opening 1st reserved ball image display area 26g, 1st starting opening 2nd reserved ball image display area 26h, 1st starting opening 3rd reserved ball image display area 26i, 1st starting opening 4th reserved ball image When the holding icon is displayed in all of the display area 26j, when the game is shifted to the winning game, the same thing is done in the time saving game state and the variable probability game state after the winning game is completed (in this case, the first start opening first reserved ball image Pattern variation corresponding to the reserved icons of the display area 26g, the first starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first starting opening third reserved ball image display area 26i, and the first starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26j the game runs without displaying the icon). Further, each time the symbol variation game is started, the symbol variation game may be started by displaying the variation icon only in the variation icon display area 26o.

Moreover, there is no particular problem even if all the icons are displayed in FIG. 73 and the symbol variation game is executed. That is, in the time-saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 72(c), the action effect is executed, and even in the normal game state, there is no problem even if the action effect is executed.

Next, using FIG. 74, the details of the above-described action effect will be described. The action effect is a display effect using the variable icon or the pending icon. An action performance performed when only the variable icon is displayed is a single action performance, and an action performance performed when the variable icon and at least one reserved icon are displayed is a synchronous action performance.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), the icons are formed in a rhombus, and the image display device 26 has a first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g, a first starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26h, 1st starting opening 3rd reserved ball image display area 26i, 1st starting opening 4th reserved ball image 26 display area j, 2nd starting opening 1st reserved ball image display area 26k, 2nd starting opening 2nd reserved ball image When displayed in the display area 26l, the second starting opening third reserved ball image display area 26m, the second starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26n, and the variation icon display area 26o, FIG. 74(a) The action effect (display) indicated by is performed.

In the action effect (display), as shown in FIG. 74(a), a diamond-shaped icon rotates horizontally. )→(4)→(5)→(6)→(7), and returns to the initial position (0) again. That is, the numbers in parentheses shown in FIG. 74(a) indicate the action positions of the icons.

In FIG. 74(b), as an example, icons (normal color (white icon) is displayed, and each icon shows how an action effect (display) is performed.
In this case, the motion effects (displays) of the three icons are synchronized (all icons change to the same motion position at the same timing), and when multiple icons are displayed, the appearance is not spoiled. devised.

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. In the following second embodiment, only parts different from the above-described first embodiment will be described, and descriptions of parts common to the first embodiment will be omitted as appropriate.
The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment mainly in the specifications of the variable probability gaming state.

(Special symbol hit determination table, normal symbol hit determination table, game state details)
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining a special symbol hit determination table, a normal symbol hit determination table, and game state details according to the second embodiment. In particular, the difference from the first embodiment is that the odds in the probability variable gaming state in the special symbol winning determination table are "1/99" for winning and "98/99" for losing.
In addition, the opening/closing support of the second starting port in the variable probability game state in the game state details is in the state B until 100 symbol variation games are completed.
That is, the game specification shown in the second embodiment is a so-called "ST probability variation" (the probability variation gaming state ends at a predetermined upper limit number of times).

FIG. 76 shows a special symbol determination table and a normal symbol determination table according to the second embodiment. Incidentally, the normal symbol determination table is configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.
In the special symbol determination table, in any of the special symbol A, the special symbol B, and the special symbol E, the game state after winning is the probability variable game state, but all of them are "upper limit 100 times". In addition, the pattern selection probability is different from that of the first embodiment.

In addition, the configuration of the special symbol of "ST probability variation" is not limited to that of FIG. 76, and may be as shown in another example of FIG.
That is, as shown in FIG. 77, in any of special symbols A, special symbols B, and special symbols D, the game state after winning is a probability variable game state, and all are "upper limit 100 times". It is not necessary to provide a symbol (special symbol C, special symbol F in FIG. 76) that shifts to a time-saving game state as a game state after hitting as shown in . That is, it may be "ST 100% probability variation".

Next, the control flow in the case of "variable ST probability" will be described, focusing on the parts different from the first embodiment.
FIG. 78 shows processing by game state according to the second embodiment.
Steps S105-4-12-17 to S105-4-12-31 are the same as in the first embodiment. Then, in step S105-4-12-32, update (add) the probability variation gaming state game number counter, update (subtract) the probability variation gaming state management counter in step S105-4-12-33, step S105-4 -12-34 when it is determined that the probability variable gaming state management counter value after updating is 0, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state in step S105-4-12-35, and in step S105-4-12-36 A game state command (normal) is set.

FIG. 79 shows winning game processing according to the second embodiment.
The steps up to step S105-5-22 are the same as in the first embodiment. Then, in step S105-5-22, it is determined whether any of the special symbols A, B, and E has been hit, and if it is determined that any one has been hit, step S105-5-23. 100 is set to the variable probability game state management counter at step S105-5-24, and the game state command (variable probability) is set at step S105-5-25. Then, in step S105-5-26, a value indicating that the game is stopped is set as a special symbol state flag.
Note that steps S105-5-27 to S105-5-30 are the same as in the first embodiment.

Next, FIG. 80 is a control flow when assuming "ST 100% probability variation" which is another example described above. It should be noted that the processing by game state may use the flow of FIG. 78 .
In the case of another example "ST 100% probability variation", when it is determined that the ending time has passed, in steps S105-5-31 to S105-5-34, steps S105-5-23 to step S105-5-23 of FIG. A process similar to that of S105-5-26 is performed.
ST probability change is realized as described above.

Incidentally, the probability variation gaming state management counter is a counter, although not shown, provided in the counter of the main RAM 103 and for managing the number of ST probability variation. In the second embodiment, the counter is set to 100, after that, when one symbol variation game is executed, "1" is subtracted, and when the probability variation gaming state management counter becomes "0", the probability variation gaming state is completed and the normal game state is entered.

(Regarding Opportunity 1 and Opportunity 2 in normal gaming state and variable probability gaming state)
Next, using FIG. 81, the opportunity 1 and the opportunity 2 in the normal game state, the opportunity 1 and the opportunity 2 in the variable probability game state will be described. Incidentally, FIG. 81 is a simple time chart for explaining the opportunity 1 and the opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state, and the opportunity 1 and the opportunity 2 in the variable probability gaming state (especially the variable ST probability).

Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 in the normal game state are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 54, so description thereof will be omitted.
Also, the trigger 1 in the variable probability gaming state is the same as the content described in FIG. 54, so the description is omitted.

Opportunity 2 in the probability variation gaming state is that the probability variation gaming state game number counter is "0" at timing (a), and from there, 100 times of symbol variation games are performed continuously without winning the winning game. At the timing (b), the variable probability game state game number counter becomes 100, and from the timing (b), it shifts to the normal game state.

That is, in the current pachinko game machines equipped with ST probability variation, for example, those with an upper limit number of less than 100 times, those with an upper limit number of around 100 times, and those with an upper limit number of less than 200 times are mainstream. Therefore, an event such as the probability variation gaming state game number counter reaching 1000 cannot occur while the probability variation gaming state remains.

That is, in the variable probability game state, the variable probability game state game number counter does not become "1000", and the normal game state game number counter does not shift to the time saving game state as when the game number counter becomes "1000". . As a result, it is possible to prevent the most advantageous variable probability game state from ending after the game is not obtained per ``1000'' times and shift to a short-time gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the variable probability game state. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost.

As described above, in the variable probability gaming state, the time-saving gaming state that operates (shifts) by the opportunity 1 is executable, and the time-saving gaming state that operates (shifts) by the opportunity 2 is not executable. As a result, an effect similar to that of FIG. 54 can be obtained.

(Third Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In addition, in the following third embodiment, only the parts different from the above-described first embodiment will be explained, and the explanation of the parts common to the first embodiment will be omitted as appropriate.
The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment mainly in the specification of the probability variation gaming state (the point where the probability variation gaming state ends when the falling lottery hits).

(Special symbol hit determination table, normal symbol hit determination table, game state details)
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining a special symbol hit determination table, a normal symbol hit determination table, and game state details according to the third embodiment. In particular, the point different from the first embodiment is that the probability in the probability variable gaming state in the special symbol winning determination table is "1/140" for winning and "139/140" for losing.
In addition, the opening and closing support of the second start port in the time-saving game state in the game state details is basically in state B until the completion of 100 symbol variation games. (fewer than 100 times).
In addition, the opening and closing support of the second starting port in the variable probability game state in the game state details is in the state B until the falling lottery is hit.
That is, the game specification shown in the third embodiment is a so-called "variable probability of falling" (variable probability game state ends with falling).

The main ROM 102 also stores a drop lottery table shown in FIG. 82(C). For example, when a game ball enters the second starting port 22, the random number for the drop lottery is also extracted, and the random number for the drop lottery is the random number specified as the win in the drop lottery table. If it matches, it is designed to shift from the probability variation gaming state to the normal gaming state.
Here, in the third embodiment, the falling hit probability is set to "1/270".

FIG. 83 shows a special symbol determination table and a normal symbol determination table according to the third embodiment. Incidentally, the normal symbol determination table is configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.
In the special symbol determination table, all of the special symbols A, B, and E are in the probability variable game state after hitting, but all are "until falling". In addition, the pattern selection probability is different from that of the first embodiment.

Next, the control flow in the case of "variable fall probabilities" will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.
FIG. 84 shows the processing when detecting the second start opening according to the third embodiment. Although the first start hole detection process is omitted, the first start hole detection process (that is, when the game ball enters the first start hole 21 in the variable probability game state) is similar to that shown in FIG. done.
A point that is particularly different from the first embodiment is that in the process of step S104-2-14, a fall determination random number value is acquired. As a result, in the falling lottery process of the special symbol variation start time process to be performed later, the falling lottery using the obtained random number value will be performed.

Next, FIG. 85 shows the special symbol variation start processing according to the third embodiment.
A point that is particularly different from the first embodiment is that a drop lottery process is performed in step S105-2-26. Since this process is performed before the special symbol per determination process, it is in the probability variation gaming state, and if you hit the fall lottery, the special symbol per determination processing is performed with a low probability, and it is in the probability variation gaming state. Therefore, if the falling lottery is not won, the special symbol winning determination process will be performed with a high probability.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart (subroutine of step S105-2-26 in FIG. 85) showing the fall lottery process.
First, in step S105-2-26-1, it is determined whether or not the fall determination random number value is a fall random number value. Then, in the process, if it is determined to be a falling random value, the game state is set to the normal game state in step S105-2-26-2, and the game state command (normal ) in the command transmission area.
As described above, the fall probability variation is realized.

(Regarding Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 in the probability of falling)
Next, Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 in the fall probability variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 87 shows the opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 88 is a simple time chart showing the opportunity 1 and opportunity 2 in the variable probability gaming state.

Figure 87 shows the trigger 1 and the trigger 2 in the normal game state, when the trigger 1 hits the winning game at the timing (a), the winning game is executed over the timing (b), and then in the time saving game state When the time-saving game state ends at timing (c), the game state shifts to the normal game state from timing (c) (similar to FIG. 54).

Trigger 2 assumes that the number-of-games-counter in the normal game state is "0" at the timing (a), and that the symbol variation game has been played continuously "1000" times without winning a winning game. . Then, when the normal game state game number counter reaches "1000" at the timing (b), the time saving game state is executed from there to the timing (c), and when the time saving game state ends at the timing (c), the timing (c ) to the normal game state (similar to FIG. 54).

FIG. 88 shows the opportunity 1 and the opportunity 2 in the variable probability game state, and is a diagram illustrating a specific example of opening and closing support of the second starting port described in detail of the game state in FIG. 82 .
First, in the opportunity 1 case 1, it is assumed that the winning game (special symbol B) is won in the normal game state, and the winning game is performed from the timing (a) to the timing (b). Then, when the winning game ends at the timing (b), the state shifts to the variable probability game state from the timing (b).

At the timing (c), for example, it is assumed that the falling lottery is won in the 50th symbol variation game in the probability variation gaming state. In this case, the probability variable gaming state is terminated, and the timing (c) shifts to the time-saving gaming state (low probability). In addition, the opening and closing support of the second starting port continues to be in state B, and the state B is 100 times in combination with the variable probability game state and the short time game state of the symbol variation game (50 times remaining in the example of FIG. 88). continue until done.

At the timing (c), even if the player wins the fall lottery, it is preferable not to notify the fact that the player has won on the image display device 26 or the like. That is, the image display device 26 does not change the background image, and the speaker 10 continues without changing the music or BGM. In other words, the player is prevented from perceiving that the game state has changed.

Then, at timing (d), when the 100th symbol variation game from timing (b) is finished, the state shifts to the normal game state from timing (d).
In the case of case 1, it is preferable to execute a judgment effect as to whether or not the falling lottery is won in the symbol variation game performed at the timing (d).
In the case 1, it is assumed that the fall lottery is won at the timing (c), so in the judgment performance performed at the timing (d), the failure performance is executed, and it is notified that the state B has ended. be done.

Next, in trigger 1 case 2, it is the same as trigger 1 case 1 up to the timing (b). Timing (c) indicates the execution of the 100th symbol variation game after shifting to the probability variation gaming state at timing (b). In other words, unlike the case 1 of opportunity 1, it is assumed that the falling lottery was not won while the symbol variation game was continuously performed 100 times in the probability variation gaming state. In this case, in the judge effect described above, the success effect is executed, and the continuation of the state B is reported. In addition, after the timing (c), it is reported that the variable probability gaming state continues.

Then, at timing (d), it is assumed that the falling lottery is won in the 150th symbol variation game from timing (b). In this case, the variable probability game state is ended, and the normal game state is entered from the timing (d). Also, with the transition to the normal game state, the state B is ended and the state is changed to the state A.
At the timing (d), the image display device 26 executes an effect in which the player's character and the enemy character confront each other. If you lose, you will fall, and so on. Therefore, at the timing (d), an effect is executed in which the player's character loses.
On the other hand, for example, between the timing (c) and the timing (d) (for example, the 130th symbol variation game), when it is determined that the winning is determined in the special symbol winning determination process, the same effect is executed, and the effect is performed. As a result of , an effect that the character on the player side wins (in the case of winning, this effect regardless of the timing) is executed.

In this way, in case 1 of the opportunity 1 case 1, since the drop lottery is won before the symbol variation game is executed 100 times, the symbol variation game is performed 100 times in a time-saving game state (low probability) from the game in which the symbol variation game was performed. Until then, it was in state B.
On the other hand, in the case of opportunity 1 case 2, since the falling lottery was won after the symbol variation game was executed 100 times, the game in which the player fell was changed to the normal game state, and the state B was ended.
In this way, in the case of the opportunity 1, depending on the timing of winning the drop lottery, there are times when the game state shifts to the time saving game state, and there are times when it does not shift to the time saving game state.

Trigger 2 is the same as Trigger 1 case 1 and case 2 up to timing (b). Then, from the timing (b), the state is shifted to the probability variation game state, and the symbol variation game is executed "1000" times without winning the winning game or the falling lottery, and at the timing (c), the probability variation game state game number counter is "I'm assuming it's 1000.
In such a case, after the timing (c), the state B is continued as the probability variable gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost.

In addition, as described in FIG. 54, in the opportunity 2, the variable probability game state may be ended at the timing (c) to set the time saving game state. In other words, the time-saving gaming state may be set from the timing (c) until the “100” symbol variation game is executed. Also, at the timing (c), the probability variable gaming state remains, but the state B may be "100" times from there. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of urgency that the player must win the winning game before the timing (c) is reached, thereby further improving the interest in the game.

Although the first to third embodiments have been described above, a trigger other than trigger 1 and trigger 2 may be used. For example, when it is determined to be a loss in the special symbol hit determination process, it is possible to select one of a plurality of special symbols of loss, and when a specific loss special symbol is selected, it is made to shift to a time-saving game state. may

In addition, in the trigger 2, when the pattern variation game is played continuously "1000" times without winning the winning game, it is assumed that the game shifts to the time saving game state, but as another trigger, the number of times the reach loss is executed is predetermined. When it reaches the number of times, it may be made to shift to the time-saving game state.

Further, the reach loss may be all reach higher than the normal reach, or may be only the super reach without including the normal reach.

Further, it may be configured to provide only the time-saving gaming state to be shifted by the opportunity 2 without providing the time-saving gaming state to be shifted by the opportunity 1 . Concretely, after the winning game, any special symbol is not shifted to the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state may be shifted only at the opportunity 2.例文帳に追加

The details of the means and the like described in the game machine will be described.
A start port (eg, first start port 21, second start port 22) formed in a game area (eg, game area 7) where a game ball can flow down, and that a game ball enters the start port Based on this, determination means (eg, main CPU 101 for performing special symbol winning determination processing) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (eg, winning game) advantageous to the player, and a game ball entering the starting port. Starting variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbols, sub-symbols) based on the fact that the ball is hit, and stopping the variable display with the passage of the variable time to derive the result of the determination (e.g., final display ) identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 27a, the second special symbol display device 27b, the image display device 26), the transition is possible based on the result of the determination, and the establishment of a predetermined condition ( For example, initialization of the main RAM 103, end of the time-saving game state, start of the time-saving game state). Specific game state control means (eg, main CPU 101) that controls (for example, time-saving gaming state to be shifted in the process of step S105-5-18, time-saving gaming state to be shifted in the process of step S105-4-12-10) , display means for displaying game result information (for example, winning game number image 26x, winning ball number image 26v) indicating the game result in a predetermined period (for example, one winning game, consecutive multiple winning games) ( For example, an image display device 26), and the display means, in a specific game state shifted based on the number of times of the variable display from the establishment of the predetermined condition satisfying a predetermined number of times, the specific game state (for example, the "100" symbol variation game in the time-saving gaming state, time-saving ending) does not display the game result information (for example, trigger 2 in FIG. 60), but the result of the determination In the specific game state shifted based on, when the termination condition of the specific game state is satisfied (for example, the "100" symbol variation game in the time saving game state, the time saving ending), the game result information can be displayed ( For example, trigger 1) in FIG. 60 is a feature.

In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine was used as an example, but the contents described in this embodiment can also be applied to a reel-type game machine (slot machine), or a rock-and-ball game machine. It can also be applied to an arrange ball game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 26 Image display device 100 Main control board 200 Effect control board

Claims (1)

a game area in which a game ball can flow down and which has a normal path and a specific path different from the normal path;
a starting port formed in the game area;
a large winning opening formed in the game area;
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player and opens the large winning opening for a predetermined number of times based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening;
Identification information display means for starting variable display of identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole, stopping the variable display with the passage of the variable time, and deriving the result of the determination;
a game state control means for controlling a first time-saving game state advantageous to the player and a second time -saving game state that is different from the first time- saving game state and advantageous to the player;
A first promotion notification prompting the shooting of the game ball toward the specific path, and a second promotion notification prompting the shooting of the game ball toward the specific path in a promotion notification mode different from the first promotion notification. a possible expedited notification means;
with
It is determined that the special game is executed in the first time-saving game state, and it is possible to shift after the special game is completed,
It is possible to shift to the second time-saving game state when a predetermined condition based on the determination that the special game is not executed is satisfied,
The promotion notification means is
It is possible to execute the first promotion notification during execution of the special game,
When the special game is ended and the state is shifted to the first time-saving game state, the first promotion notification can be executed, but the second promotion notification is not executed,
It is possible to execute the first promotion notification and the second promotion notification when transitioning to the second time- saving gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images